Home

K2 Storage System Instruction Manual

1. 2nd L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed L3 RAID Chassis media media server 2 server 1 Connect Ethernet cabling as shown in the following diagram November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 141 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Install L3 RAID Ethernet cabling as shown Expansion Chassis have no direct Ethernet connections L3 RAID Chassis Connect to a Ethernet cable y ne i control por ease eaeene gt Sooo S0SSS FS OE oe oe Ethernet Switch Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis Every chassis must have a chassis address The leve
2. 3rd L3 RAID 1St L3 RAID Expansion Expansion Chassis Chassis 2nd L3 RAID Expansion z L3 RAID Chassis 1 h Chassis media media media media server server server server 2B 1B 2A 1A Media servers 1A and 1B are a redundant pair Media servers 2A and 2B are a redundant pair Connect Ethernet cabling as shown in the following diagram November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 183 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Install L3 RAID Ethernet cabling as shown Expansion Chassis have no direct Ethernet connections Ov 00 O 0 2ee2 n EIRIOL ii A 1i 7 Connect to a L3 RAID Chassis Ethernet cables Connect to a control port y Y control port J ann os Smi Se nao oa o Ethernet Switch B Ethernet Switch A Assign chassis address on optional Expans
3. LL Power Cords 115V 230V Power up Verification e DIR and SVP LEDs on the RAID controllers are blinking green e Disk Link LED is steady ON green e FLT and BAT LEDs are OFF The front Power LED is ON Service LED is OFF after about 5 minutes Refer to the L3 RAID Instruction Manual if there is a problem Power LED Service LED er QO A Your preparations for L3 RAID storage are now complete Preparing K2 Storage System clients Any devices that function as iSCSI clients to the K2 Storage System must be prepared with the following requirements e One or more connections to the control network e A static IP address for the control network e One or more connections to the media ASCSI network Additional steps that are required for NewsEdits include the following e Implement NewsEdit security features For more information refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide Additional steps that are required for K2 Media Clients include the following 144 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral e If the K2 Media Client connects to the K2 Storage System with a redundant Ethernet fabric such as in Levels 2R and 3R install Multi path I O software For more information refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral As you confi
4. Expansion Expansion Chassis 7 Chassis 6 Chassis Chassis Address 3 Address 3 Em m D ie O X ky 20 IRS EZR KS dii A N Expansion Expansion Chassis 5 Chassis 4 Chassis Chassis Address 2 Address 2 2 qo S cooo ig x m od O X f oc le Gi Ms Da Expansion Expansion Chassis 3 Chassis 2 Chassis Chassis Address 1 D L1 D L Address 1 Soo JE H 000 y T E ops Aan O al SX ool e oo Oo oO a z aa alll i 9 Ki 07 PS d g Chassis Adaren Expansion L3 RAID ra Be not n m n Chassis 1 Chassis aeea Chassis Address 0 November 23 2005 Do not swap Expansion chassis or otherwise reconfigure storage If you connect a L3 RAID Expansion chassis to the wrong controller such that the Expansion chassis contains disk modules that were bound using a different controller you will lose your media file system K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 143 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Power on the L3 RAID chassis Connect power cords and turn on power as shown You must power up any RAID Expansion chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Controller chassis Verify power up as shown
5. PA SS OB OS Oe i Ethernet Switch A A Connect to control ports Ethernet cables November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 33 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Power on the L1 RAID chassis Connect and turn on power as shown O 2625262 Qd858686 2080020 OLOOTO 2802980000808090 0909 0 BOROROROROROROROROROROZO OO0060 OOOO a _ U 115V 230V Connect power cords Cv grass valley L oo OOoooooo0oo0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 L ae OO aO OOL OO o0 OE0 SoC SO OEC OOC SOO OOO OSOON a Release and flip down front bezel Power LED Service LED pmr G GV001234 L5 Q gt o fe Le o 0 0 qe o SOOTSSOCOOOSO OOO Press standby button Power up Verification e Power LED Goes on and stays on e Service LED Stays off Refer to the L7 RAID Instruction Manual if there is a problem Configure L1 RAID network settings Use standard Windows procedures to do the following 34 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Preparing K2 Storage System clients e Assign t
6. 2nd L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed L 1St L3 RAID oy E P O Expansion XDZ z X Chassis aR i 7 Sij if installed YS yrs O S INN D 182 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual ES EID Do not connect any Expansion Chassis to DLO DL1 DLO DL1 DLO f e MEIED L3 RAID Chassis LJ To To media media media media server server server server 2B 1B 2A 1A Media servers 1A and 1B are a redundant pair Media servers 2A and 2B are a redundant pair November 23 2005 Setting up the L3R RAID chassis If you have three or more expansion chassis connect RAID storage for a level 3 redundant system as follows Connect Fibre Channel cabling Connect Expansion Chassis 2 5 to DL1 5th L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed 4th L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed Connect Expansion Chassis 1 to DLO
7. root_cppc_1 Control point 192 168 100 8 1 PC root_client_1 iSCSI client 192 168 100 111 192 168 99 111 root_client_2 iSCSI client 192 168 100 121 192 168 99 121 root_client_3 iSCSI client 192 168 100 131 192 168 99 131 root_client_4 iSCSI client 192 168 100 141 192 168 999 141 This IP address must resolve to hostname root _raid_1_ he0 Setting up host tables The hosts file is used by the network to determine the IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name hostname is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts on Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server operating system computers If you include the names and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other K2 devices instead of editing the hosts file on each K2 device Add the _he0 suffix to hostnames associated with FTP Streaming ports Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for more information If transferring to or from a Profile XP or Open SAN system via UIM the hosts file must also follow UIM naming conventions for those systems Refer to the UIM Instruction Manual To edit the hosts file manually 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts 2 Enter all IP addresses with machine names The text format is sim
8. This NIC is not used since this server does not take the role of FTP server November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 189 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System gt This NIC is not used since this server does not take the role of FTP server This IP address must resolve to hostname root_server_3_he0 d This IP address must resolve to hostname root_server_4 he0 Setting up host tables The hosts file is used by the network to determine the IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name hostname is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts on Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server operating system computers If you include the names and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other K2 devices instead of editing the hosts file on each K2 device Add the _he0 suffix to hostnames associated with FTP Streaming ports Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for more information If transferring to or from a Profile XP or Open SAN system via UIM the hosts file must also follow UIM naming conventions for those systems Refer to the UIM Instruction Manual To edit the hosts file manually 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts 2 Enter all IP addresses with machine names The text fo
9. cccesseeeseceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeessaaaeaeeeees 108 Prerequisites for initial configuration ccccccseeeeeceesseeeceeseeesceeeeeecseaseesesaaeeess 108 Defining a NeW K2 Storage SyStOM ccccccccssssesssseeceeeeeeeeessaeaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeesaaaas 109 Configuring the media Server Part 1 cccccecccceeeeceeeeeseseeeeeeeeseesaeeseeeeeeeeeeeess 111 COMPIGUGIAG RAID cscs teens fences anea 113 Creating a NeW file Syste Mea a 120 Configuring the media Server Part 2 cccccccccccccececseeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeees 121 Configuring the redundant media server cccccccecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeseaeeeeeeeeeeess 124 Adding K2 Storage System clients ccccccceeeceeeececeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesesssaaaaeeeeeeeeeess 127 Basic operations for level 2R storage ccccsseeccceseeeeeecaeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeessueeeeeesaeeees 128 Level 2R power off procedure ccccseseeccecccceeeeeeeeecaeaeseeeecsaueaeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeesaaas 128 Level 2R power on procedure ccccccsesseceecccceeeesceeeecseaeseeeeecaueueeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeesaaas 129 USINO FEP TOE ranse nnan a T ieee 130 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Level 3 system description cccccccssseccccecseeseeceeecceeeeeeeeessaseceeeessaaeeeeessssaaeeeeeess 132 Preparing level 3 devit S eccrine e a a T e E tae tealieas 133 Setting up the Control POINt PO rerasanan E i 133 Setting up the level 3 GigE Swit Menr ae e E 134 Setting UP the
10. Shutting down or restarting a K2 Media Server To shut down or restart a K2 Media server that is in the role of media file system and database server first put the server out of service as explained in the procedures earlier in this section Then you can shut down or restart the K2 Media Server To shut down or restart a K2 Media server that is not in the role of media file system and database server such as a FTP server you must remember that the K2 Media Server hosts the iSCSI interface adapters by which clients access the shared storage Therefore you should stop all media access before shutting down or restarting any K2 Media Server Identifying K2 Media Server software versions Your options for identifying K2 Media Server software version are as follows e In NetCentral select the Facility button then in the tree view open the node for the K2 Media Server This exposes the subsystems You can find software version information on property pages for the Software subsystem and the Roles subsystem e In the K2 System Configuration application tree view open the node for the K2 Media Server This exposes the nodes for individual configuration pages Select the Software configuration page to view software version information To check for recent changes in software click the Check button Modifying K2 Media Server network settings Read the following sections for considerations and procedures for modifying network settings on a K2 M
11. e Configure SNMP properties so the trap destination points to the NetCentral server PC If you are not using the SNMP community name public configure the community name and set permissions to RW Also make sure that the Authentication trap is enabled Also refer to K2 Media Server description on page 226 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis Do the following to prepare the L2 RAID storage devices e Install the chassis in its permanent location Refer to the L2 RAID Instruction Manual for rack mount instructions e Assign Fibre Channel address ID on page 99 e Connect the L2 RAID chassis on page 99 e Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis on page 100 e Power on the L2 RAID chassis on page 102 In addition you will configure network settings SNMP settings and bind LUNs These tasks are part of the K2 System Configuration application and Storage Utility procedures later in this chapter The process of binding LUNs can take a significant amount of time as much as eight hours so you might want to put priority on the tasks necessary to start the LUN binding process then catch up with other tasks while the LUNs are binding Also refer to K2 Level 2 RAID storage description on page 230 98 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis Assign Fibre Channel address ID Every RAID controller must have a unique Fibre Channel address ID th
12. 1 Verify that RAID storage devices Ethernet switches and other supporting system are powered up Refer to the installation chapter for your level of K2 Storage System earlier in this manual for power on procedures 2 If K2 Media Servers are powered down power them up Refer to the installation chapter for your level of K2 Storage System earlier in this manual for power on procedures 3 Place K2 Media servers in service If you have redundant servers make sure that you place primary backup servers in service in the proper order Refer to Placing a K2 Media Server in service on page 275 4 Bring all K2 Media Clients and all iSCSI clients online Refer to Bringing a K2 Media Client online on page 280 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 269 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Managing redundancy on a K2 Storage System If you have a redundant K2 Storage System Level 2R or Level 3R use the procedures in this section to control the primary redundant roles of the K2 Media Servers Procedures are as follows e Identifying current primary backup K2 Media Servers on page 270 e Triggering an intentional failover on page 272 Identifying current primary backup K2 Media Servers Before attempting any configuration or service work on a redundant K2 Media Server you must be know if server is the current primary server or the current backup server for the media f
13. 21 Chapter 1 Product Description Overview Description The K2 Storage System is Grass Valley s shared storage solution that gives multiple clients access to acommon pool of media Clients access the shared media storage via a Gigabit Ethernet network and a Fibre Channel connection Data is communicated using the Small Computer System Interface SCSI data transfer interface and the Internet SCSI GSCSI protocol iSCSI Clients iSCSI over Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI to SCSI Bridge SCSI over Fibre Channel RAID Storage Refer to the sections later in this manual for the system description of each of the different levels of storage available as follows Level 1 system description on page 26 Level 2 system description on page 54 Level 2R system description on page 90 Level 3 system description on page 132 Level 3R system description on page 172 Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for diagrams and explanations of the media file system and the media database The Grass Valley K2 Media Client can also support a direct Fibre Channel connection to the storage Contact your Grass Valley representative for more information 22 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Key features Key features The key features of the K2 Storage System are as follows November 23 2005 iSCSI storage access protocol Gigabit Ethernet connectivity RAID 1 3 and 5 storage FTP trans
14. Modifying K2 Media Server network settings on page 276 e Modifying K2 Media Server media network settings on page 277 e Recovering from a failed K2 Media Server system battery on page 278 Accessing K2 Media Server features In the K2 Configuration Application features for working on a K2 Media Server are as follows Select the K2 To make these Media Server features available R B Retrieve Configuration Shutdown Reboot Reconfigure Remove 10 16 40 67 Taking a K2 Media Server out of service This procedure applies to K2 Media Servers that are taking the role of media file system and database server H fl 10 16 40 66 When you put a K2 Media Server out of service you stop services such that the K2 Media Server is prevented from functioning as a media file system and or database server In this state no media operations can take place If there is just one K2 Media Server in the role of media file system and database server levels 1 2 and 3 before you take the K2 Media Server out of service you should stop all media access on the K2 Storage system To keep media access stopped you should take all K2 Media Clients offline If there are redundant K2 Media Servers currently in service both primary and backup in the role of media file system and database server levels 2R and 3R take only the backup out of service Do not take the primary out of service If you take
15. The K2 System Configuration application launches a remote instance of Storage Utility which configures RAID storage devices Storage Utility components run on the K2 Media Server and the configuration actually takes place via the Fibre Channel connection between the K2 Media Server and the RAID storage device e K2 Level 1 RAID The media server parameters are configured by the K2 System Configuration application while the RAID storage parameters are configured by Storage Utility e Ethernet switches The K2 System Configuration application can launch a switch s web based configuration application If necessary you can install and run the K2 System Configuration application on multiple PCs in your facility Refer to Accessing a K2 Storage System from multiple PCs on page 268 for constraints and considerations November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 235 Chapter amp Overview of K2 Storage Tools To open the K2 System Configuration application do the following L On the control point PC open the K2 System Configuration application shortcut on the desktop The K2 System Configuration application log in dialog box opens 2 Log in using the designated administrator account for configuring K2 Storage 3 System devices By default this account is as follows Username administrator Password adminK2 The K2 System Configuration application opens When you select a K2 storage Toolbar buttons
16. _heO suffix You can use host tables as in Setting up host tables on page 148 or another mechanism to provide the name resolution This directs the streaming traffic to the correct port Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for a complete explanation Only K2 Media Servers in the role of FTP server need to be on the streaming network This is because all streaming traffic goes directly to the shared storage On the K2 Media Client the four GigE ports are configured as two teams On external storage models one team is for the control network and one team is for the media SCSI network Each team shares a single IP address This provides redundancy Do not attempt to un team these ports Use the following procedures as necessary to implement your networking strategies November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 147 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System NOTE Media network iSCSI IP addresses and Streaming network IP addresses are assigned using the K2 System Configuration application Networking tips Establish a consistent convention for machine names and IP addresses It is recommended that you embed a root name or other unique identifier for this particular K2 Storage System in the computer name Also a common convention for IP addresses is to use a numerical pattern or sequence in the IP addresses to indicate device types and or ports as in the following example NOTE This example a
17. m Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure m Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below V SNFS file system server V iSCSI bridge IV Media database server FTP server T NAS server Enter the name or IP address for the media server as currently configured on the machine For level 3 server roles leave SNFS file system server iSCSI bridge and Media database server selected Click Next Software Configuration This page checks for the software required to support the roles you selected on the previous page HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 a a x Installed software Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Operating System Microsoft R Windows R Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Hoon KOO software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DOK SOK software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK KOK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software
18. on page 182 Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis on page 184 Power on the L3R RAID chassis on page 186 In addition you will configure network settings SNMP settings and bind LUNs These tasks are part of the K2 System Configuration application and Storage Utility procedures later in this chapter The process of binding LUNs can take a significant amount of time as much as eight hours so you might want to put priority on the tasks necessary to start the LUN binding process then catch up with other tasks while the LUNs are binding Also refer to K2 Level 3 RAID storage description on page 232 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 181 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Assign Fibre Channel address ID Every RAID controller must have a unique Fibre Channel address ID that identifies the controller on the Fibre Channel fabric On the L3R RAID you do not need to manually set the Fibre Channel address ID as it is pre set at the factory Connect the L3R RAID chassis If you have one or two expansion chassis connect RAID storage for a level 3 redundant system as follows Connect Fibre Channel cabling Connect Expansion Chassis 1 amp 2 to DL1
19. shift click or control click to select disks d Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process 118 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID A Progress Report Me Curent Status Busy Commands List StartTime Binding LUN on Controllert In progress 16 48 45 Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 48 52 cas Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 48 55 eee Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 07 fre Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 75 ere Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 23 ere f Close the Progress Report and repeat these steps for other unbound disks If specified by your system design you can bind some disks as Hot Spares as explained in Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 When you are done if you did not bind any extra Hot Spares you should have the following results For level two redundant storage on the primary RAID storage chassis you should have two RAID 1 LUNs of two disks each one Hot Spare disk and two RAID 3 LUN of five disks each If yo
20. Adding a K2 Media client on page 280 e Identifying K2 Media Client software versions on page 282 e Modifying K2 Media Client control network settings on page 282 e Modifying K2 Media Client media network settings on page 282 e Modifying load balancing on page 283 Accessing K2 Media Client features In the K2 Configuration Application features for working on a K2 Media Client are as follows Select the K2 To make these Media Client features available a a Gi ta amp Shutdown Reboot Take Offline Remove 3a EC Newh System Retneve Configuration E TB GASAN2 O E Bf 10 16 40 67 E GES witcht 10 16 40 66 Taking a K2 Media Client offline When you put a K2 Media Client into the offline state its channels are disconnected from the media database In this state no media operations can take place While there are no configuration tasks for which the offline state is required you can use the Take Offline feature whenever you want to prevent media access operations from starting Before taking a K2 Media Client offline you should stop all media access To take a K2 Media Client offline in the tree view select the K2 Media Client and then click Take Offline and then Yes to confirm November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 279 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Taking all K2 Media Clients offline
21. For either option you must do the following for the control point PC that runs the K2 System Configuration application e Assign a control network IP address to the PC Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Connect the PC to the GigE control network To use your own PC you must additionally do the following e Verify that the PC that meets the following system requirements You might have November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 173 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System to install some supporting software e Microsoft Windows XP e 400 MB hard disk space Professional Service Pack 2 e Minimum 512 MB RAM 1 GB e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 recommended e Graphics acceleration with at least e Java JRE 1 3 1_12 and 1 4 2_05 128 MB memory This is required for the HP Ethernet e Pentium 4 or higher class processor Switch configuration interface 2 GHz or greater e Install the Control Point software Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software e Install and license NetCentral server software You can install this on the the NetCentral server PC which can be the K2 configuration control point PC Refer to the NetCentral User Guide Also refer to Control point PC description on page 224 Setting up the level 3R redundant GigE switches These procedures are for the HP ProCurve switch If you are using the Cisco Catalyst switch make connections and settings to provide the same functionali
22. Trap Address 1 10 16 A 4 o oa a Oo 0 OD OF Cancel 2 Enter network settings 3 For each SNMP manager to which you want to send SNMP trap messages enter the IP address of the PC hosting the manager For monitoring with NetCentral enter the IP address of the NetCentral server PC 4 Click OK to save settings and close 5 Restart the RAID chassis to put SNMP configuration changes into effect Configuring Level 3 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings Thought Storage Utility you can configure the following settings on a RAID chassis e IP address e Subnet mask e Gateway Address e SNMP trap destinations November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 299 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System For the Level 3 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the RAID controller Therefore if the RAID chassis has two controllers each controller must be configured separately as in the following procedure 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view open the node for a K2 Media Server and select the File System Server node to open its property page On the property page click Launch Storage Utility Storage Utility opens You can now configure the network settings on the controller connected to the selected K2 Media Server 2 In the Storage Utility right click the icon for a RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties The Network Settings
23. You can take all the K2 Media Clients in a K2 Storage System offline with one operation When you put a K2 Media Client into the offline state its channels are disconnected from the media database In this state no media operations can take place While there are no configuration tasks for which the offline state is required you can use the Take Offline feature whenever you want to prevent media access operations from starting Before taking K2 Media Clients offline you should stop all media access To take all K2 Media Clients offline in the tree view select the K2 Media Server and then click Take Offline and then Yes to confirm Bringing a K2 Media Client online You have two options for bringing K2 Media Client that is currently in the offline State back into the online state as follows e Restart the K2 Media Client When the K2 Media Client starts up it is always in the online state e In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the K2 Media Client and then click Bring Online e Inthe K2 System Configuration application tree view select the top node of the K2 Storage System and then click Bring Online This brings all the K2 Media Clients in the storage system online Shutting down or restarting a K2 Media Client Before you shut down or restart a K2 Media Client you should stop all media access Your options for shutting down a K2 Media Client are as follows e Do a local shutdown restart via AppCenter A
24. 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Client _ _ Configuration HE File System Client Configuration 10 16 40 145 a x This media server does not function as a file system server It does function as a file system client which is validated from this page M File system client configuration This file system client will connect to the file system server s listed here saj File system server 1 File systern drive letter v File system client parameters Unconfigured When you click next the file system parameters will be written to the device lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration check is successful click Next K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Adding K2 Storage System clients On this page Do this iSCSI Bridge Server _ Configuration HmiscsI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 x M Bridge redun
25. Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next 76 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID On this page Do this Network Configuration S Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 K x This page displays the m Network Configuration control network Ethernet The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device ou can modify the Rn IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the port and allows you to appropriate row and clicking the Modify button configure the FTP dint ES LL J MAC Address IP Address Subnet l Streaming network Ethernet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 C5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the o
26. If your site s policies require using a different SNMP community name contact your Grass Valley representative To configure these settings do the following 1 Launch Storage Utility from the K2 System Configuration application as in the previous procedure If the RAID chassis has two controllers you will configure the network settings on the controller currently selected when you launch Storage Utility 2 As prompted wait while Storage Utility gathers system information then Storage Utility opens 3 In Storage Utility tree view expand the node for the L3R RAID right click the icon for a L3R RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties The Controller Network Settings dialog box opens For a level 3R RAID chassis with two controllers these settings are for controller connected to the K2 Media Server currently selected or being configured in the K2 System Configuration application 198 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID Controller Network Settings _ 0 Network Configuration IP Address EE 168 100 41 Subnet Address 255 255 254 U SNMF Configuration 0 0 Trap Address 1 10 16 HA 43 0 0 0 0 OF Cancel 4 Enter the control network IP address and other network settings 5 You want SNMP trap messages go to the NetCentral server PC so for SNMP Configuration enter the IP address of the NetCentral s
27. Maximum altitude Operating 4 6 Km 15 000 ft Non operating 4 6 Km 15 000 ft November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 225 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices K2 Media Server description The central component of level 2 2R 3 and 3R storage systems is the K2 Media Server It is built on a Dell PowerEdge 2850 platform E ogo Scene a oga l eo e A ZZ Serial connector GigE 2 Keyboard Mouse GigE 1 Power supply 1 ii ie USB ports 2 Power supply 2 Video connector The following interfaces provide K2 Storage System functionality e Two GigE ports on the motherboard e Two iSCSI interface cards Also referred to as TOEs TCP IP Offload Engines e One Fibre Channel card with two Fibre Channel ports This is the Grass Valley Fibre Channel card Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software for a description of software components K2 Media Server specifications The K2 Media Server is built on a Dell 2850 PowerEdge server platform with specifications as follows Characteristic Specification Processor 2 8GHz 1MB Cache Xeon 800MHzFront Side Bus Memory 1 GB Hard Drives 36GB RAID 1 Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Fibre Channel Adapter GVG SCSI iSCSI Adapters Two Qlogic SANblade 1 Gbps iSCSI TOE PCI X Host Bus Adapters Removable
28. On 100 completion power cycle the RAID controller chassis then restart the K2 Media Server Downloading disk drive firmware You might be instructed K2 release notes to upgrade disk drive firmware This allows you to take advantage of the disk drive enhancements and benefit from improved performance and reliability November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 295 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System To determine your disk drive type and current firmware version select a disk drive icon in the Storage Utility tree view then note the drive properties reported in the right hand pane Use the following procedure if you need to download disk drive firmware NOTE The disk drives on each controller are upgraded one at a time which can take as long as 2 minutes per drive Take this into consideration when scheduling the upgrade Requirements for this procedure are as follows e All K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients must be powered down or in some other way disconnected from the K2 Storage System e The K2 Media Server through which Storage Utility is connected to the RAID Storage must be powered up e All other K2 Media Servers must be powered down To download disk drive firmware do the following 1 In the Storage Utility right click a controller in the tree view then select Advanced Download Disk Firmware in the context menu The Open File dialog box opens NOTE You can downl
29. P Expansion Chassis if installed Expansion Chassis if installed Chassis Address 1 Chassis Address 1 QO lt lt Ly S X Chassis Address 0 L3 RAID Chassis Expansion Chassis if installed Regardless of how many Expansion Chassis you have or the DLO DL1 connection pattern for the first Expansion Chassis connected to DL1 set the Chassis Address to 0 Then on the remaining Expansion Chassis connected to DL1 set Chassis Addresses sequentially Chassis Address 0 Chassis Address on RAID Chassis is pre set Do not attempt to change this setting November 23 2005 Do not swap Expansion chassis or otherwise reconfigure storage If you connect a L3R RAID Expansion chassis to the wrong controller such that the Expansion chassis contains disk modules that were bound using a different controller you will lose your media file system K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 185 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Power on the L3R RAID chassis Connect power cords and turn on power as shown You must power
30. Please wait Observe progress 3 A message box reports results Respond as follows e If no unreferenced movies are found click OK to dismiss the results e If unreferenced movies are discovered you are prompted to delete them Click Yes to delete the movies or No to leave the movies intact Making a new media file system The requirements for this procedure are as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be shut down NOTE You lose all media with this procedure To make a new media file system do the following 1 Click Tools Make New File System The Settings dialog box opens 286 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Making a new media file system faq Settings MES Please enter the number of RTIOs m Windows Security OK Cancel 2 Configure the Settings dialog box as follows e For Real Time Input Output RTIOs enter the number specified for the design of your K2 Storage System Contact your Grass Valley representative if you do not know this number e For Windows Security on a K2 Storage System with only K2 Media Clients leave this setting unchecked e For Windows Security on a K2 Storage System with NewsEdits refer
31. SSiS ccccccccccsseeseeeeceeeeeeeecaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeaseeeeees 62 Preparing K2 Storage System clients ccccccceceeecsesseeeeeeeeeeeesesaeesseeeeeeeeeeees 66 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral cccccccceccsessseseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 67 INCIWOIKING TOF level 2 arrora E a E E a 69 Networking requirements nsnennnnnennnernnnenrrnrnrrrnrrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrsnrrrrnnrrrrennrersnenne 69 NEIWOrKINO NOS nnana a a a ae 70 Seting WO OS LAOS rtas a E ate toda adie ts 70 Testing the control MCIWONK icce ee ee tee ee eae a 71 Configuring the level 2 Storage system ccccccecceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaaeeseeeeeeeeeeess 72 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Contents Chapter 4 Chapter 5 4 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Prerequisites for initial configuration cccccceseeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeessuaneeeesaaeess 72 Defining a NeW K2 Storage SYStOM cccccccccecssssseeeceeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesessaaas 73 Configuring the media Server Part 1 ainnean ena a 75 Conng rnng RAID cosest lee cette E E NE 77 Ghealing a New Ile SV tecer a E 82 Configuring the media server Part 2 ccccccccccceececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Adding K2 Storage System clients ccccccccseeseeeeeeceeeeeeecaeaeeeeseeeeeeeeesesssasaaeeeeeeeeeess 86 Basic operations for level 2 storage cccccsseseececeseeeeceeseeecceaeseee
32. Stacking VLAN Configuratio _SupportMgmt URL Enabled 100 1000T Enable 100 1 000T Enable 10071000T Enable 10071000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ei 8 Modify Selected Ports 5 Select all ports leave Mode as default of Auto and set Flow Control to Enable 6 Choose VLAN Configuration If prompted log in with the switch s administrator username and password November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 59 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System sw1 Status Non Critical HP J4905A4 ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G igenity Stats Configuration SECY Diagrosics Suppo Device View Fault Detection System Info IP Configuration Port Configuration Monitor Port Device Features Stacking Support Mgmt URL VLAN Type Tagged Ports Untagged Ports Forbid Ports STATIC None i 18 20 Primary N te STATIC None 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Modify P None ADD REMOVE VLANs C GVRP Enabled GVRP Mode 7 Create anew Media GSCSI VLAN as follows a Click Add Remove VLANs Currrent YLAN Definitions Add Remove VLAN 1 DEFAULT_VLAN Primary 60 Media VLAN Name Media 802 10 VLAN ID 60 Add VLAN New YLAN Name
33. Using FTP for file transfer November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 221 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System 222 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter Description of K2 Storage Devices This chapter contains descriptions of the devices that make up the K2 Storage System as follows e Control point PC description on page 224 e K2 Ethernet switch description on page 225 e K2 Media Server description on page 226 e K2 Level 1 RAID storage description on page 228 e K2 Level 2 RAID storage description on page 230 e K2 Level 3 RAID storage description on page 232 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 223 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices 224 Control point PC description A control point PC runs applications from which you operate configure and monitor the K2 Storage System You can have one or more PC that provide control point functionality However you must have only one designated control point PC on which you install and run the K2 System Configuration application The primary applications that can run on a control point PC are as follows e The K2 System Configuration application e Storage Utility e AppCenter e NetCentral Refer to Chapter 8 Overview of K2 Storage Tools for descriptions of these applications You can purchase a control point PC from Grass Valley In this case the PC has al
34. When all required software reports as Installed click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 155 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System On this page Do this Network Configuration This page displays the control network Ethernet port and allows you to configure the FTP Streaming network Ethernet port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports For Level 3 since this server does not take the role of FTP server configuring the second port here for the FTP streaming network is not required HE Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 W xj m Network Configuration The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device You can modify the IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the Modify button SS EOS Port 0 No Port 1 No MAC Address 00 11 43 35 34 C04 00 11 43 35 34 C05 LIP Address 10 16 40 145 0 0 0 0 SSUES SSS SSS 255 255 254 0 0 0 0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Stream
35. and maintenance of your K2 Storage System However if necessary you can install and run the K2 System Configuration application on multiple PCs in your facility The rule for multiple access is that the first instance of the K2 System Configuration application to access a K2 Storage System in essence locks out any other instances It is therefore recommended that you constrain your use of the application from multiple PCs as follows e Designate a control point PC as the configuration PC and then configure the K2 Storage System or device from that PC only e On the other control point PCs limit operations to view only when accessing the K2 Storage System You can select nodes in the tree view to view devices roles and subsystems However do not click any buttons except the Check buttons that appear on property pages To access a K2 Storage System from multiple control point PCs do the following 1 Install Control Point software on the designated K2 System Configuration control point PC and complete the initial system configuration Close the K2 System Configuration application on that PC 2 Install Control Point software on another control point PC and open the K2 System Configuration application 3 Select Retrieve Configuration and enter the name or IP address of the K2 Media Server for the K2 Storage System If the K2 Storage System has multiple K2 Media Servers you must enter the name or IP address of the server con
36. controller microcode 290 295 D D drive 246 database replication 237 271 275 DEC VT 100 28 56 93 135 175 default cfg 126 210 Dell PowerEdge 2850 226 device provider 35 67 103 145 187 disk drive firmware 295 Disk numbering 290 Downloading 295 E E drive 247 electric shock avoiding 9 emission limits certifications 11 Erase media database 287 Ethernet switch description 225 Expansion Adapter 63 100 Expansion chassis 65 101 143 185 231 expansion chassis 182 failover 272 275 Failover Monitor service 275 FC AL 230 232 Fibre Channel K2 Media Client connected 22 Fibre Channel address ID 63 99 141 182 Fibre Channel card 226 Fibre Channel RAID Chassis hot spare drives 294 fire hazard avoiding 9 firewall 263 first birthday 247 FTP commands 258 FTP GigE port 255 FTP interface 257 FTP IP address 255 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 303 Index 304 FTP server 255 FTP Streaming IP address 125 166 209 213 216 FTP streaming ports 37 69 104 147 188 FTP streaming transfers 255 full Bind 293 G Gateway Address RAID 78 114 157 198 golden drive 244 Graphics acceleration 27 55 91 133 174 Grass Valley PC Monitoring software 36 67 103 145 187 grounding safety 9 GXF 257 H hard shutdown 280 heartbeat signal on the serial cable 272 hexadecimal 290 host names 37 69 104 147 188 hosts file 38 70 105 148 190 256 hosts files 37 69 104 147 188
37. following password manager user name K2admin 10 When prompted for the password enter a password You can use the default K2 password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 15 Decide your SNMP community name as explained in the following options then proceed with the next step e If you decide to use a unique SNMP community name not public add the community and set its RW permissions For example if the community name is K2 type the following snmp server community K2 unrestricted e If you decide to use the default SNMP community public for NetCentral monitoring which already has RW permissions set as required by NetCentral proceed to the next step 16 Enter the SNMP community and IP address of the NetCentral server PC For example if the IP address is 192 168 40 11 and the community is public you type the following snmp server host public 192 168 40 11 17 Enable Authentication traps by typing the following snmp server enable traps authentication This allows NetCentral to test the switch to verify that it can send its SNMP trap messages to NetCentral 18 Type menu to get to menu mode 19 If you need trunks to gang switches together using 1 Gig connections do the following Note This is not required if you use the 10 Gig ISL connections a Select Switch Configuration b Choose selection 2 Port Trunk Settings c Press the ri
38. that K2serverl is coming online as backup K2server is not yet qualified to act as backup because the Movie database is potentially out of sync with the Movie database on K2server2 The Failover Monitor service detects this so it triggers the replication of the media database from K2server2 onto K2server1 In Server Control Panel monitor the database replication process Wait until database replication completes as reported by the Server Control Panel After database replication is complete verify K2serverl as backup as explained in Identifying current primary backup K2 Media Servers on page 270 10 All failover processes are complete All media management mechanisms are now November 23 2005 running and K2serverl is now qualified and acting as the backup K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 273 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Working with K2 Media Servers Use the procedures in this section when doing configuration or service work on a K2 Media Server that is part of an existing K2 Storage System Procedures are as follows e Accessing K2 Media Server features on page 274 e Taking a K2 Media Server out of service on page 274 e Placing a K2 Media Server in service on page 275 e Shutting down or restarting a K2 Media Server on page 276 e Removing a K2 Media Client on page 281 e Identifying K2 Media Server software versions on page 276 e
39. 1 Launch Storage Utility from the K2 System Configuration application as in the previous procedure If the RAID chassis has two controllers you will configure the network settings on the controller currently selected when you launch Storage Utility 2 As prompted wait while Storage Utility gathers system information then Storage Utility opens 3 In Storage Utility tree view expand the node for the L2 RAID right click the icon for a L2 RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties The Controller Network Settings dialog box opens 114 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Controller Network Settings _ 0 Network Configuration IP Address EE 168 100 41 Subnet Address 255 255 254 U SNMF Configuration 0 0 Trap Address 1 10 16 HA 43 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OF Cancel Enter the control network IP address and other network settings Click OK and OK to save settings and close Binding disk modules Configuring RAID You want SNMP trap messages go to the NetCentral server PC so for SNMP Configuration enter the IP address of the NetCentral server PC You can also enter IP addresses for other SNMP managers to which you want to send SNMP trap In Storage Utility click View Refresh Continue with the next procedure Binding disk modules Use the following procedure to bind disk modules as required for the level 2R storage syst
40. 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed OOK XOX software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed POX KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK oN Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 215 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System On this page Do this Network Configuration This page displays the control network Ethernet port and allows you to configure the FTP Streaming network Ethernet port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports HE Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 W xj m Network Configuration The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device You can modify the IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the Modify button SS Port MAC Address IP Address Subnet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 25
41. 23 2005 Using FTP for file transfer Device Verification instructions Power on the Ethernet switch This description is for the HP ProCurve switch For the Cisco Catalyst switch refer to the documentation you received with the switch The switch performs its diagnostic self test which takes approximately 50 seconds to complete LED Behavior during the self test is as follows e Initially all the status LED Mode and port LEDs are on for most of the duration of the test e Most of the LEDs go off and then may come on again during phases of the self test For the duration of the self test the Test LED stays on When the self test completes successfully the Power and Fan Status LEDs remain on the Fault and Test LEDs go off and the port LEDs on the front of the switch go into their normal operational mode which is as follows e If the ports are connected to active network devices the LEDs behave according to the LED Mode selected In the default view mode Link the LEDs should be on e If the ports are not connected to active network devices the LEDs will stay off If the LED display is different than what is described above especially if the Fault and Test LEDs stay on for more than 60 seconds or they start blinking the self test has not completed correctly Refer to the manual you received with the switch for troubleshooting information Power on RAID storage devices Power on expansion
42. 282 Hot Spare 116 200 294 hot spare drives 294 Hot Spares 81 119 160 203 hot swap 298 HP Ethernet Switch java 27 55 91 133 174 HP ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G 225 HTTP 264 injury precautions 9 Intel 245 Internet SCSI GSCSI 22 IP address RAID 78 114 157 198 IP address of the Ethernet switch 124 208 IP addresses 37 70 105 148 189 iSCSI clients 35 37 66 69 102 104 144 147 186 188 266 277 iSCSI configuration 85 123 164 207 iSCSI interface adapter 61 98 139 180 228 277 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual J Java 27 55 91 133 174 224 journal files 116 200 journal stripe 121 205 K K2 Administrator 262 K2 Client software 241 K2 Media Server description 226 K2 Media Server system battery 278 K2 Server software 241 K2 software installing 243 K2 System Configuration 235 242 K2 User 262 L LED level 1 RAID 52 level 2 RAID 87 129 level 3 RAID 169 220 switch 52 87 129 168 219 load balancing 277 282 283 logs 264 Make New File System 48 82 120 161 204 maximum cable length 27 media database 238 media disk drive naming 285 media file system 285 286 checking 285 Media network 36 69 104 147 188 media network IP address 50 85 123 126 164 167 207 210 214 217 metadata files 116 200 metadata stripe 120 204 Microsoft NET 224 Microsoft NET Framework 27 55 91 133 174 Multi Path I O software 241 242 Multi path I O software 35 67 103 145 187
43. 42 23 E E i SAN_UIM1 ene 10 16 42 32 m ae meee Other 3rd party devices nnn nh hhh Command Control network Port 1 or if redundant ports 1 and 3 mm E Media Streaming network Port 2 or if redundant ports 2 and 4 The following example shows the contents of a default Windows hosts file with new lines added that match the IP addresses and host names in the previous sample diagram All lines beginning with a are comments and can be ignored or deleted Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments Such as these may be inserted on 256 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 About the K2 FTP interface individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol H For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server F 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host 127 0 0 1 localhost 10 16 42 10K2 MediaClient 10 0 0 10K2 MediaClient_he0 10 16 42 21 K2 MediaClient 1 10 16 42 22 K2 MediaServer 1 10303 0 22 K2 MediaServer 1 heod 10 16 42 23 ControlPointPC 10 16 42 60 NewsEdit1 10 0 0 60
44. A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 209 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System On this page Do this File System Server Configuration This page checks on the configuration of the media server in one of its main roles as a file system server The media server also functions as a file system client which is also checked from this page It is not necessary to bind LUNS or create a file system since this task was completed when you configured the previous media server However if the level 3R RAID chassis has two controllers you must launch Storage Utility from this page to configure controller 1 network settings HE File System Server Configuration ooDESMS M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch Storage Utility Note There is already a primary file system on this SAN You do not need to launch Storage Utility to create a file system The application will automatically configure the file system on this server Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure the storage system and file system Shared file system client configuration aA File system server 1 File system server 2 oS ESkS File system client parameters Unconfigured lt Back Next gt Can
45. CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 8 From the main menu choose Console Passwords and press Enter The Set Password Menu opens 9 Chose Set Manager Password and press Enter 10 Enter a password You can use the default K2 administrator password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 11 Return to the main menu 12 Tab to Command Line CLI and press Enter The command prompt appears 13 Type configure to change to configuration mode 14 You now configure an administrator username You can use the default K2 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 93 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System administrator username K2admin or your site s username for administering the K2 Storage System For example to set the username to K2admin type the following password manager user name K2admin 10 When prompted for the password enter a password You can use the default K2 password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 15 Decide your SNMP community name as explained in the following options then proceed with the next step e If you decide to use a unique SNMP community name not public add the community and set its RW permissions For example if the community name is K2 type the following snmp server community K2 unrestricted e If you decide to use the defaul
46. Description of K2 Storage Devices Provides descriptions and specifications of the devices of the K2 Storage System Chapter 8 Overview of K2 Storage Tools Contains overview descriptions for the system tools used with the K2 Storage System Chapter 9 Managing K2 software Contains descriptions of the software components that provide the K2 Storage System functionality Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System Contains descriptions of networking and interface requirements for FTP streaming transfers Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Contains instructions for customizing and maintaining the K2 Storage System so that it meets your site s workflow requirements November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 15 Finding Information Getting more information The following illustration shows the recommended order in which to reference the documentation Path for the installer of K2 Media Client models with internal storage a S Ni aio K2 Media Client K2 Media Client Release Notes Quick Start Guide System Guide Contains the latest information Contains the essential steps for Cantaine th i about the hardware and installing the K2 Media Client B pronug l l specifications and software shipped with the SD only and HD SD models each step by step instructions for system Packaged with K2 have their own version packaged modifying system settings Media Client wi
47. Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure m Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below Iv SNFS file system server Iv iSCSI bridge V Media database server FTP server NAS server Enter the name for the media server This should be the current network name of the machine Enter the name or IP address of the Ethernet switch as currently configured on the switch to which the media server is connected For level 3 redundant select SNFS file system server iSCSI bridge and Media database server Click Next 208 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the redundant media server 1B On this page Do this Software Configuration This page checks for the software required to support the roles you selected on the previous page Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 k a x M Installed software Operating System Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Microsoft R Windows R Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DOK KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK KOK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt
48. GigE media connections and a Fibre Channel card for the RAID storage connection The iSCSI interface cards provide a bridge between GigE iSCSI and Fibre Channel SCSI The media server also hosts software components that allow it to function in various roles including media file system manager media database server and FTP server The L2 RAID chassis is connected via a single Fibre Channel connection to the media server It is also connected to the GigE control network which is required for SNMP NetCentral monitoring The K2 configuration control point PC is connected to the GigE control network The K2 System Configuration application runs on this PC for configuring the storage system Refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices for more information 54 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Preparing level 2 devices Preparing level 2 devices Use the topics in this section to prepare each device so that it 1s ready to become part of the level 2 storage system Setting up the control point PC on page 55 Setting up the level 2 GigE switch on page 56 Setting up the K2 media server on page 61 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis on page 62 Preparing K2 Storage System clients on page 66 Setting up the control point PC To set up the K2 configuration control point PC you have the following options Use the Grass Valley control point PC that comes from the factory with software
49. Grass Valley personnel Removing a K2 Storage System The requirements for removing a K2 Storage System from the K2 System Configuration application are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e The K2 Storage System can continue operations while it is removed from the K2 System Configuration application There is no need to put devices offline or restart devices e For ongoing maintenance and support you must always have at least one control point from which you can access the K2 Storage System with the K2 System Configuration application If you have installations of the K2 System Configuration application on multiple control point PCs do not remove the K2 Storage System from all control point PCs at the same time To remove a K2 Storage System from the K2 System Configuration application do the following 1 In the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree 2 Click Remove The storage system is removed from the tree view November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 267 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Accessing a K2 Storage System from multiple PCs It is recommended that you install the K2 System Configuration application on one PC only in your facility This eliminates potential problems in the installation configuration
50. HOON SOK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the L1 RAID storage device before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as nstalled click Next 44 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID On this page Do this Network Configuration S Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 K x This page displays the m Network Configuration control network Ethernet The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device ou can modify the Rn IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the port and allows you to appropriate row and clicking the Modify button configure the FTP dint ES LL J MAC Address IP Address Subnet l Streaming network Ethernet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 C5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the L1 RAID stor
51. K2 Level 3 RAID specifications The K2 Level 3 RAID chassis is a NEC S1400 model with specifications as follows Characteristic Specification Host interface Fibre Channel Data transfer rate 350 MB s max Can operate in 1 Gbps mode if the settings are changed Number of host ports 4 ports Cache memory 2 GB 1 GB per controller Cabinet dimensions 482 mm 19 W x 596 mm 23 5 D x 131 mm 5 2 H same for basic chassis and expansion chassis Weight 45 kg 99 2 pounds or lighter same for basic chassis and expansion chassis Power consumption 660 to 2 205 W For UPS choice a safety allowance of 30 of the power consumption is necessary Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC 10 x2 50 60 Hz Ambient temperature Operating 5 C to 40 C Halting 10 C to 60 C Relative humidity without condensation Operating 10 to 80 Halting 5 to 80 Wet bulb temperature Operating 0 C to 27 C Halting 8 C to 29 C Allowable vibration level Operating 0 25 G Halting 0 5 G Labeling according to the energy saving law Class G Energy consumption efficiency 0 10 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 233 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices 234 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 8 Overview of K2 Storage Tools Topics in the chapter include the following e K2
52. K2 Media Client For external storage run Storage Utility only via the K2 System Configuration application The Storage Utility is your primary access to the media file system the media database and media disks of the K2 Storage System for configuration maintenance and repair It is launched from the K2 System Configuration application CAUTION Use the Storage Utility only as directed by a documented A N procedure or by Grass Valley Support If used improperly the Storage Utility can render your K2 Storage System inoperable or result in the loss of all your media The Storage Utility s primary functionality is hosted by the K2 media server The Storage Utility uses the Fibre Channel connection between the K2 media server and the RAID storage device for access and configuration When you launch Storage Utility from the K2 System Configuration application on the control point PC you use a Storage Utility remote interface to control the main application as it runs on the K2 Media Server The Storage Utility requires that the storage system be in an offline operating mode before it allows any configuration to take place Use the K2 System Configuration application to take your K2 Storage System devices offline before configuring with Storage Utility This means all media access operations are disabled while you are using the Storage Utility NOTE Do not run Storage Utility as a stand alone application separate from the K2 System Confi
53. Level 2R power off procedure e Level 2R power on procedure e Using FTP for file transfer For other procedures refer to Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System on page 261 Level 2R power off procedure Use the following sequence to power off the level 2R storage system 1 Power off all K2 Media clients or other iSCSI clients 2 From the K2 System Configuration application in the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which 1s the top node of the storage system tree Then click the Server Control Panel button 2 The Server Control Panel opens Server Control Panel K2seryer K2server g This Failover Monitor i running E This Failover Monitor i running This File System Server is primary This File System Server is backup E This Database Server it primary E This Database Server is backup Database Replication i running Stark Stop Stark Stop E2 eerverl is the primary FSM kesemez it the backup FSM 3 Take note of which is the primary K2 Media Server and which is the backup K2 Media Server The order in which you put servers back into service when you power up the K2 Storage System is dependent on their primary backup roles at the time when you power down the K2 Storage System For the backup K2 Media Server click Stop This takes the server out of service Shut down the backup K2 Media Server if it does not shut down automatically For the pri
54. NewsEdit1 he0 10 16 42 31 SAN XP1 10 0 0 32 SAN XP1 he0 SAN UIM1 he0 10 16 42 32 SAN UIM1 About the K2 FTP interface An application writer may choose to initiate media file transfers via FTP If you do not have a preferred brand of FTP software you can use Microsoft Internet Explorer The K2 FTP interface displays with a GXF folder and an MXF folder Use the appropriate folder depending on if you are transferring GXF or MXF If connecting to the FTP server on a K2 system from a third party Windows PC make sure that the PC has TCP Window scaling enabled For more information on TCP Window scaling see the Microsoft Support Knowledge Base web site The K2 FTP server runs on K2 Media Servers that have the role of FTP server While it also runs on internal storage K2 Media Clients stand alone it is important to understand that it does not run on external storage K2 Media Clients When you FTP files to from a K2 Storage System you use the FTP server on the K2 Media Server not on the K2 Media Client that accesses the shared storage on the K2 Storage System If you attempt to transfer FTP files to from one of the K2 Storage System clients the transfer fails For information on streaming transfer procedures in general see the K2 Media Client User Guide November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 257 Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System NOTE When using FTP ina shared storage environment please ensure that all FTP c
55. Power on Ethernet switch Ethernet cables connected Control network IP address assigned VLANs and trunks set up Power on K2 Media Server Ethernet cables connected Fibre Channel cable connected Redundant servers connected by serial cable Software installed as from the factory Control network IP address assigned Power on L3R RAID chassis Fibre Channel address ID assigned to RAID controller s Fibre Channel cable s connected Ethernet cable s connected Power on L3R RAID Expansion Chassis address assigned for Fibre Channel chassis Fibre channel cable s connected optional Power on 192 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Defining a new K2 Storage System Defining a new K2 Storage System Define a level 3R K2 Storage System as follows 1 On the control point PC open the K2 System Configuration application A login dialog box opens Please enter the administrative account name and password that will be used to configure the K2 sustems User name Password Ok Cancel 2 Log in to the K2 System Configuration application with the Windows adminstrator account By default this as follows e Username administrator e Password adminKk2 Refer to Setting up application security on page 262 for more information about administrator accounts and logging in to applications Jh K2 System Configuration File K2System Device Help Ja i New K2 System Retrieve Conf
56. S safety certification 13 grounding 9 summary 9 terms and symbols 10 SAMBA shares 263 security 262 serial cable 273 serial connection K2 Media Server 98 Server Control Panel 128 218 237 270 service safety summary 11 Small Computer System Interface SCSI 22 SNMP community name 29 57 94 135 176 SNMP trap 29 35 36 58 61 67 79 94 98 103 115 136 139 145 158 176 180 187 199 RAID 78 114 157 198 software components 242 Specify Target Type 244 SpyWare 262 Storage Utility 78 114 157 198 235 237 242 283 StorNext 245 Streaming network 36 69 104 147 188 Subnet mask RAID 78 114 157 198 subnet mask 37 70 105 148 189 Supero Doctor 245 support Grass Valley 19 synchronizing the media file system 285 system diagram K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 305 Index level 2 storage 54 level one storage 26 level three redundant 172 level three storage 132 level two redundant 90 T TCP 264 TCP ports 263 TCP Window scaling 257 TCP IP Offload Engines TOE 226 teams 37 69 105 147 189 trunks 30 58 94 136 176 U UDP 263 UIM 38 70 106 149 190 unreferenced files or movies 286 USB ports 263 Username 262 V ventilation 9 video driver 244 virus scanning 262 VLANs 30 58 95 136 177 VT 100 28 56 93 135 175 W web site for Thomson Grass Valley 17 Windows account 262 Windows Administrator 262 Windows Security 287 X XML 245 306 K2 Storage Syste
57. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Grass Valley can affect emission compliance and could void the user s authority to operate this equipment November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 11 Safety Summaries Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance EN55103 1 2 Class A Warning This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A pr scrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada This product has been evalu
58. W Z if or rs SNS RAY C Do not swap Expansion chassis or otherwise reconfigure storage If you connect a L2 RAID Expansion chassis to the wrong controller such that the Expansion chassis contains disk modules that were bound using a different controller you will lose your media file system Aa K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 101 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Power on the L2 RAID chassis Connect power cords and turn on power as shown You must power up any RAID Expansion chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Controller chassis Verify power up as shown LL Power Cords 115V 230V Power up Verification e Ready LEDs on RAID controllers are steady ON e Front panel Power LED is ON Service LED is OFF after approximately 3 minutes Refer to the L2 RAID Instruction Manual if there is a problem Power LED Service LED mee ee A Your preparations for L2 RAID storage are now complete Preparing K2 Storage System clients Any devices that function as iSCS
59. Wizard This wizard defines the type and number of devices on your K2 system Name Enter a name for the K2 system System configuration Level Select the type of K2 system you are creating C Level 2 C Level 3 Custom C Nearline L Server redundancy F Check this option if this system has failover capabilities lt Back Cancel Create a name for your level 1 K2 Storage System and type it in the Name box Select Level 1 Leave the Server redundancy option unchecked Click Next Page 2 HE New K2 system Page 2 E x 10 16 40 145 Device Assignment For the standard configurations the number of servers and switches is fixed Define the number of clients on this K2 system by selecting the appropriate device type and clicking the Select button Available device types Number of devices K2 Media Server i i K2 Media Server Ethernet Switch Ethernet Switch K2 Media Client K2 Media Client Generic iSCSI Client K2 Media Client Fibre Channel Switch lt Remove K2 Media Client K2 Media Client lt Back Next gt Cancel Move clients into the Number of Devices box as appropriate for your system You cannot change the number of K2 Media Servers or Ethernet Switches as these are pre configured based on the level you selected in the previous page Note The Level 1 RAID Storage device is represented as a K2 Media Server in the K2 System Configuration app
60. address as currently configured on the switch 3 Press Enter to open the switch s configuration application NOTE The configuration application for the HP ProCurve switch requires Java You can also access the switch s configuration application from the K2 System Configuration application 4 In the switch s configuration application choose Configuration then Port Configuration November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 177 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System sw1 Status Non Critical h HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G D Fe identity Configuration SECUNY Diagnostics SOPP EN cM monitor Port _Device Features _Stacking _VLAN Configuration _SupportMgmtURL Port Port Enabled Config Flow ne Mode Control 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 1 00 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1000T Yes Auto Enable 4100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g 1 Modify Selected Parts 5 Select all ports leave Mode as default of Auto and set Flow Control to Enable 6 Choose VLAN Configuration If prompted
61. already a primary file system on this SAN You do not need to launch Storage Utility to create a file system The application will automatically configure the file system on this server Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 frsaoeenn SEEE File system server 2 File system client parameters Unconfigured lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check Confirm a default cfg file copied message When the wizard reports that the configuration check is successful click Next and Yes to confirm copying default cfg to the other server If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions related to this message later in the procedure iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapters and the page validates that the Fibre Channel adapter is in place and that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HS iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 aa x m Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge C Primary Backup iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration Hg The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this devic
62. and other WMI based components to perform process monitoring This provides the information for some of the SNMP trap messages that must be sent to NetCentral e Control point PC monitored by NetCentral The K2 configuration control point PC must be added to the NetCentral system and fully monitored by NetCentral This especially means that its SNMP trap destination is set to send SNMP traps to the NetCentral server PC This is critical as a SNMP trap is used as the mechanism by which the K2 configuration information is communicated to NetCentral Whether the control point PC and the NetCentral server PC are the same PC or are different PCs you must still add the control point PC to NetCentral In addition NetCentral automatically changes its view of the K2 Storage System whenever you use the K2 System Configuration application to do one of the following e Remove a K2 Storage System e Rename a K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 145 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System e Add a device to a K2 Storage System e Remove a device from a K2 Storage System Refer to the NetCentral User Guide to set up the NetCentral system After installing a device provider you can find additional documentation about monitoring that type of device on the NetCentral Help menu 146 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Networking for level 3 Networking for level 3 Use the top
63. and the message Press any key to continue Press a key and you will then see the switch console command CLI prompt At the prompt enter setup to display the Switch Setup screen Tab to the IP Config DHCP Bootp field and use the Space bar to select the Manual option Tab to the IP Address field and enter the switch s control network IP address Refer to Networking tips on page 32 Tab to the Subnet Mask field and enter the subnet mask used for your network Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 175 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System 8 From the main menu choose Console Passwords and press Enter The Set Password Menu opens 9 Chose Set Manager Password and press Enter 10 Enter a password You can use the default K2 administrator password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 11 Return to the main menu 12 Tab to Command Line CLI and press Enter The command prompt appears 13 Type configure to change to configuration mode 14 You now configure an administrator username You can use the default K2 administrator username K2admin or your site s username for administering the K2 Storage System For example to set the username to K2admin type the
64. box Click Launch Storage Manager Storage Utility opens 3 Continue with the next procedure Configuring RAID to use Storage Utility to configure the storage and file system Leave the Configure K2 Server wizard open while you are using Storage Utility When you are done with Storage Utility you continue with the wizard as explained in Configuring the media server 1A Part 2 on page 205 Configuring RAID Use Storage Utility to complete the configuration of the L3R RAID chassis as explained in the following topics November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 197 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System e Configuring L3R RAID network and SNMP settings e Binding disk modules Refer to Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 192 to confirm that the RAID storage is ready for configuration Configuring L3R RAID network and SNMP settings Use the Storage Utility to configure the following settings for the level 3R RAID controllers e IP address e Subnet mask e Gateway Address e SNMP trap destinations For level 3R RAID network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the RAID controller module Therefore if the RAID chassis has two controllers each controller has its own network settings and the RAID chassis exists as two entities on the control network In addition the RAID storage device is configured by default for the SNMP community name public
65. can also manually disable a controller In the event that one of the RAID controllers appears operational but also reports faults through various log files and status indicators you can choose to disable the controller and replace it Disabling the controller and removing it in this way avoids interruptions in signal output that can occur if the module fails or if it is simply hot swapped while it is the active controller When the replacement RAID controller module 1s installed it is automatically enabled and becomes the backup controller For the Level 3 primary RAID chassis with two controllers if the replacement controller s firmware is not the same as the firmware on the redundant currently installed controller the firmware on the replacement controller is automatically upgraded or downgraded to match the current system level firmware NOTE Refer to the Instruction Manual for your level of RAID storage chassis for procedures on removing and replacing the RAID controller module To replace a controller do the following 1 Open the Storage Utility 2 Expand the tree view to display the controllers 3 Select the controller and check its status then proceed as follows e If the faulty controller reports as disabled proceed to the next step in this procedure e Ifthe faulty controller reports as online right click the controller icon in the tree view and select Advanced Disable Controller 0 or Disable Controller 1 then cl
66. chassis on page 33 e Preparing K2 Storage System clients on page 35 November 23 2005 Setting up the control point PC Setting up the control point PC To set up the K2 configuration control point PC you have the following options e Use the Grass Valley control point PC that comes from the factory with software pre installed This includes the K2 System Configuration application remote AppCenter and NetCentral software e Use a PC that you own and install the required software For either option you must do the following for the control point PC that runs the K2 System Configuration application e Assign a control network IP address to the PC Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Connect the PC to the GigE control network To use your own PC you must additionally do the following e Verify that the PC that meets the following system requirements You might have to install some supporting software e Microsoft Windows XP e 400 MB hard disk space Professional Service Pack 2 e Minimum 512 MB RAM 1 GB e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 recommended e Graphics acceleration with at least e Java JRE 1 3 1_12 and 1 4 2_05 128 MB memory This is required for the HP Ethernet e Pentium 4 or higher class processor Switch configuration interface 2 GHz or greater e Install the Control Point software Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software e Install and license NetCentral server software You can install thi
67. chassis however the restart at the end of the Configure K2 Server wizard suffices so you do not need to restart now 6 Close the Storage Utility 7 Continue with the next procedure Configuring the LI RAID storage device Part a Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 2 1 Return to the Configure K2 Server page from which you launched Storage Utility and proceed as described in the following table NOTE The Level I RAID Storage device is represented as a K2 Media Server in the K2 System Configuration application November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 49 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System On this page Do this File System Server Configuration S File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 a x M Storage and shared file system server configuration This page checks on the S 2 ees configuration of the L1 RAID storage device in one of its main roles as a file system Server The LI R AID M Shared file system client configuration storage device also functions File system server 1 fiow40145 o as a file system client which is also checked from this page File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration is correct click Next If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this proce
68. explanation of how disks are actually numbered in Storage Utility November 23 2005 Configuring RAID f GYG Storage Utility File View Actions Tools Help Humber of disks 2 To bind unbound disks for media storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Bind LUN 5 x LUM Type RAID 5 i Full Bind Avallable Disks Selected Disks Flash the drive lights Identify November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 159 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it b In the LUN TYPE drop down box select RAID 5 c In the Available Disks box select five contiguous disks at the top of the list TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks d Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process A Progress Report O x Current Status Busy Commands List Binding
69. following settings for the level 3 RAID controller e IP address e Subnet mask e Gateway Address e SNMP trap destinations For level 3 RAID network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the RAID controller module Therefore if the RAID chassis has two controllers each controller has its own network settings and the RAID chassis exists as two entities on the control network In addition the RAID storage device is configured by default for the SNMP community name public If your site s policies require using a different SNMP community name contact your Grass Valley representative To configure these settings do the following 1 Launch Storage Utility from the K2 System Configuration application as in the previous procedure If the RAID chassis has two controllers you will configure the network settings on the controller currently selected when you launch Storage Utility 2 As prompted wait while Storage Utility gathers system information then Storage Utility opens 3 In Storage Utility tree view expand the node for the L3 RAID right click the icon for a L3 RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties The Controller Network Settings dialog box opens For a level 3 RAID chassis with two controllers these settings are for controller connected to the K2 Media Server currently selected or being configured in the K2 System Configuration application November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction M
70. for configuration Configuring L2 RAID network and SNMP settings Use the Storage Utility to configure the following settings for the level 2 RAID chassis e IP address e Subnet mask e Gateway Address e SNMP trap destinations For level 2 RAID network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the RAID LAN card Therefore the combined RAID storage devices including the one or two RAID controllers and the optional Expansion chassis is a single entity on the control network In addition the RAID storage device is configured by default for the SNMP community name public If your site s policies require using a different SNMP community name contact your Grass Valley representative To configure these settings do the following 1 Launch Storage Utility from the K2 System Configuration application as in the previous procedure If the RAID chassis has two controllers you will configure the network settings on the controller currently selected when you launch Storage Utility 2 As prompted wait while Storage Utility gathers system information then Storage Utility opens 3 In Storage Utility tree view expand the node for the L2 RAID right click the icon for a L2 RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties The Controller Network Settings dialog box opens 78 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Controller Network Settings _ 0 Network Configuration IP Addr
71. in the context menu The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Bind LUN 5 x LUM Type RAID 3 M Full Bind Avalable Disks Selected Disks Flash the drive lights Identity 80 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it b In the LUN TYPE drop down box for select RAID 3 c In the Available Disks box select five contiguous disks at the top of the list TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks d Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process Progress Report Mel x Current Status Busy Commands List StartT ime Binding LUN on Controllert In progress 16 48 45 Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 48 52 cas Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 48 55 eee Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 49 07 fre Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 75 ere Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 23 ere f Close the Progress Report
72. log in with the switch s administrator username and password sw1 Status Non Critical gt HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G rA ldertity Stats Configuration SECUTTY Diagnostics Suppor Device View Fault Detection _Systeminfo Configuration _Port Configuration _Monitor Pot _DeviceFeatures Stacking lt VLAN Configuration _ l _SupportMgmtURL VLAN Type Tagged Ports Untagged Ports Forbid Ports Auto STATIC None DEFAULT_ LAN STATIC GVRP oi la a None Mocity 18 20 Primary None STATIC None STATIC GVRP 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 Modify 19 None ADD REMOVE VLANs GVRP Enabled GYRF Mode 7 Create anew Media GSCSI VLAN as follows a Click Add Remove VLANs 178 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 3R redundant GigE switches Currrent VLAN Definitions Add Remove VLAN 1 DEFAULT_YLAN Primary 60 Media VLAN Name 802 10 VLAN ID 60 Add YLAN New YLAN Name Rename Selected VLAN Set Primary LAN Remove Selected VLAN s Main Screen b In the VLAN Name field enter Media c In the VLAN ID field enter 60 d Click Add VLAN e Click Main Screen to return to VLAN Configuration 8 Configure the Media VLAN as follows a In the Media VLAN row click Modify November 23 2005 f Configure the default Control VLAN as follows Modify Port YLAN Configuration Port Current Mode VLAN
73. number of K2 Media Servers or Ethernet Switches as these are pre configured based on the level you selected in the previous page Click Next 74 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 1 On this page Do this Page 3 New K2 system Page 3 E x You have defined a K2 system with the following information Name 10 16 40 145 Configuration Level X eceu K2 system Number of servers x Number of switches x Number of clients x When you click Finish a tree view will be created showing the devices on your K2 system Click the Configure button to configure each device All servers must be configured before any clients lt Back Cancel Review the information on this page and verify that you have correctly defined your K2 Storage System For a level 2 storage system you should have the following e One Gigabit Ethernet switch e One K2 Media Server e The number and type of clients appropriate for your system Click Finish The Define New K2 Storage System wizard closes Your K2 Storage System appears in the tree view of the K2 System Configuration application Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server Part 1 Configuring the media server Part 1 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select PrimaryK2Server Prirnan2 Server Le 2 Click the Configure button Configure The Config
74. numerical pattern or sequence in the IP addresses to indicate device types and or ports as in the following example NOTE This example assumes a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Example of Level 3R names and IP addresses Computer name Device type Streaming network addresses Control network addresses Media network addresses Comments root_server_1 Media server 192 168 101 11 192 168 100 11 192 168 99 11 192 168 99 12 root_server_2 Media server 192 168 101 21 192 168 100 21 192 168 99 21 192 168 99 22 These two servers are a redundant pair root_server_3 Media server 192 168 101 31 192 168 100 31 192 168 99 31 192 168 99 32 These two servers are a redundant pair root_server_4 Media server 192 168 101 414 192 168 100 41 192 168 99 41 192 168 99 42 root_raid_1 RAID 192 168 100 51 Each RAID root_raid_2 RAD 192 168 100 52 pon the control network for monitoring root_gige_1 GigE switch 192 168 100 61 root_gige_2 GigE switch 192 168 100 62 root_cppc_1 Control point 192 168 100 81 PC root_client_1 iSCSI client 192 168 100 111 192 168 99 111 Redundant ports root_client 2 iSCSI client 192 168 100 121 192 168 99 12 Safe a teamed IP address root_client_3 iSCSI client 192 168 100 131 192 168 99 131 root_client_4 iSCSI client 192 168 100 141 192 168 99 141
75. page Click Next Completing the Configuration Wizard Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Do not proceed until restart processes are finished If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes If you got a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message on the File System Server Configuration page after the K2 Media Server restarts do the following 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view under the K2 Media Server select the File System Server node q 10 16 40 36 kal Software 23 Network PE File System Server 23 Media Database Se The File System Server Configuration page appears 2 Click Check and verify that the V drive is shared This is required for NAS server functionality Your configurations for the level 2R K2 Storage System are complete Adding K2 Storage System clients You can add now clients such as K2 Media Clients or NewsEdits to the K2 Storage System and configure them using the K2 System Configuration application e For NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions e For K2 Media Clients refer to K2 Media Client System Guide for instructions November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 127 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Basic operations for level 2R storage Use the following procedures as you work on your level 2R storage system e
76. page 69 e Configuring the level 2 storage system on page 72 e Adding K2 Storage System clients on page 86 e Basic operations for level 2 storage on page 86 Work through these topics sequentially to install the storage system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 53 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Level 2 system description Multiple iSCSI clients joquog elps 01 U09 elps 01 U0 epon Fil 01u00 Gigabit Ethernet switch Control point PC EPON _ eipey K2 media server Fibre Channel connection L2 RAID chassis L2 RAID Expansion chassis optional The level 2 storage system has one K2 media server and one L2 RAID chassis An Expansion chassis is optional for increased storage capacity K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are connected to the GigE switch Each client has one GigE connection for media and one GigE connection for control The GigE switch is configured with V LANs to keep the control FTP traffic and the media SCSI traffic separate The K2 Media Server has two GigE connections for media one GigE connection for control one GigE connection for FTP and one Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage The media server hosts iSCSI interface cards for the
77. power on procedure e Using FTP for file transfer For other procedures refer to Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System on page 261 Level 1 power off procedure Use the following sequence to power off the level 1 storage system 1 Power off all K2 Media clients or other iSCSI clients 2 Power off the L1 RAID storage device November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 51 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System 3 Power off all Ethernet switches 4 Power off the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC if necessary Level 1 power on procedure Use the following steps to power on the level 1 storage system Device Verification instructions 1 Power on the control point After log on start NetCentral NetCentral reports devices as PC and or the NetCentral offline As each device is powered on check NetCentral to verify server PC the device s status 2 Power on the Ethernet The switch performs its diagnostic self test which takes switch approximately 50 seconds to complete LED Behavior during the This description is for the HP ProCurve switch For the Cisco Catalyst switch refer to the documentation you received with the switch self test is as follows e Initially all the status LED Mode and port LEDs are on for most of the duration of the test e Most of the LEDs go off and then may come on again during phases of the self test For the duration of
78. pre installed This includes the K2 System Configuration application remote AppCenter and NetCentral software Use a PC that you own and install the required software For either option you must do the following for the control point PC that runs the K2 System Configuration application Assign a control network IP address to the PC Refer to Networking tips on page 32 Connect the PC to the GigE control network To use your own PC you must additionally do the following Verify that the PC that meets the following system requirements You might have to install some supporting software e Microsoft Windows XP e 400 MB hard disk space Professional Service Pack 2 e Minimum 512 MB RAM 1 GB e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 recommended e Graphics acceleration with at least e Java JRE 1 3 1_12 and 1 4 2_05 128 MB memory This is required for the HP Ethernet e Pentium 4 or higher class processor Switch configuration interface 2 GHz or greater Install the Control Point software Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software Install and license NetCentral server software You can install this on the the NetCentral server PC which can be the K2 configuration control point PC Refer to the NetCentral User Guide Also refer to Control point PC description on page 224 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 55 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Setting up the level 2 GigE switch Th
79. safety regulations are published in the Laser Product Performance Standard Code of Federal Regulation CFR Title 21 Subchapter J The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard 825 Radiation of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide governs laser products outside the United States Europe and member nations of the European Free Trade Association fall under the jurisdiction of the Comit Europ en de Normalization Electrotechnique CENELEC 12 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Certifications and Compliances Safety Certification This product has been evaluated and meets the following Safety Certification Standards Standard Designed tested for compliance with ANSI UL60950 CAN CSA Safety of Information Technology Equipment including C22 2 No 60950 00 Electrical Business Equipment Third edition 12 01 2000 IEC 950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third edition 1999 EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third Edition 2000 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 13 Safety Summaries 14 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Finding Information This manual describes the K2 Storage System and provides instructions for installing and using the product in a variety of app
80. take a significant amount of time as much as eight hours so you might want to put priority on the tasks necessary to start the LUN binding process then catch up with other tasks while the LUNs are binding Also refer to K2 Level 2 RAID storage description on page 230 62 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis Assign Fibre Channel address ID Every RAID controller must have a unique Fibre Channel address ID that identifies the controller on the Fibre Channel fabric To set the Fibre Channel address ID on the L2 RAID refer to the following diagram Set a Fibre Channel address on the L2 RAID controller 0 DG Address ID 1 al l A Connect the L2 RAID chassis Connect Fibre Channel cabling Maximum of 1 Expansion Chassis L2 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed To media server A L2 RAID F Chassis Connect Ethernet and diagnostic cabling as shown in the following diagram Be aware of the foll
81. the K2 Storage System control network e Device providers installed A device provider must be installed on the NetCentral server PC for each type of device in the K2 Storage System For a level 2R storage system the following device providers must be installed e Control point PC device provider This is the Windows monitoring device provider e K2 Media Server device provider e HP Gigabit Switch device provider or Cisco Gigabit Switch device provider e K2 Media Client device provider if any K2 Media Clients are accessing the level 2R storage system e Device provider for iSCSI clients if any iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are accessing the level 2R storage system e K2 Level 2 RAID storage device provider e Grass Valley PC Monitoring software installed This software must be installed on the K2 configuration control point PC It includes Grass Valley SNMP agents and other WMI based components to perform process monitoring This provides the information for some of the SNMP trap messages that must be sent to NetCentral e Control point PC monitored by NetCentral The K2 configuration control point PC must be added to the NetCentral system and fully monitored by NetCentral This especially means that its SNMP trap destination is set to send SNMP traps to the NetCentral server PC This is critical as a SNMP trap is used as the mechanism by which the K2 configuration information is communicated to NetCentral Whether the c
82. the chassis address to 1 on both L2 RAID Expansion adapters Chassis ID 0 Address 1 Do not swap Expansion chassis or otherwise reconfigure storage If you connect a L2 RAID Expansion chassis to the wrong controller such that the Expansion chassis contains disk modules that were bound using a different controller you will lose your media file system K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 65 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Power on the L2 RAID chassis Connect power cords and turn on power as shown You must power up any RAID Expansion chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Controller chassis Verify power up as shown LL Power Cords 115V 230V Power up Verification e Ready LEDs on RAID controllers are steady ON e Front panel Power LED is ON Service LED is OFF after approximately 3 minutes Refer to the L2 RAID Instruction Manual if there is a problem Power LED Service LED mee ee A Your preparations for L2 RAID
83. the main menu screen 8 From the main menu choose Console Passwords and press Enter The Set Password Menu opens 9 Chose Set Manager Password and press Enter 10 Enter a password You can use the default K2 administrator password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 11 Return to the main menu 12 Tab to Command Line CLI and press Enter The command prompt appears 13 Type configure to change to configuration mode 14 You now configure an administrator username You can use the default K2 administrator username K2admin or your site s username for administering the K2 Storage System For example to set the username to K2admin type the following password manager user name K2admin 10 When prompted for the password enter a password You can use the default K2 password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 15 Decide your SNMP community name as explained in the following options then proceed with the next step November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 135 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System e If you decide to use a unique SNMP community name not public add the community and set its RW permissions For example if the community name is K2 type the following snmp server community K2 unrestricted e If you decide to use the default SNMP community public for N
84. the same tasks as appropriate Consult the documentation that came with the switch for more information 1 Configure the PC terminal emulator on the control point PC or another PC as a 134 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 3 GigE switch DEC VT 100 ANSI terminal or use a VT 100 terminal and configure either one to operate with these settings e Baud rate 9600 e 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and flow control set to Xon Xoff e Also disable uncheck the Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows option 2 Connect the PC to the switch s Console Port using the console cable included with the switch 3 Turn on the PC s power and start the PC terminal program 4 Press Enter two or three times and you will see the copyright page and the message Press any key to continue Press a key and you will then see the switch console command CLI prompt 5 At the prompt enter setup to display the Switch Setup screen 6 Tab to the IP Config DHCP Bootp field and use the Space bar to select the Manual option 7 Tab to the IP Address field and enter the switch s control network IP address Refer to Networking tips on page 32 8 Tab to the Subnet Mask field and enter the subnet mask used for your network 9 Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to
85. the self test the Test LED stays on When the self test completes successfully the Power and Fan Status LEDs remain on the Fault and Test LEDs go off and the port LEDs on the front of the switch go into their normal operational mode which is as follows e If the ports are connected to active network devices the LEDs behave according to the LED Mode selected In the default view mode Link the LEDs should be on e If the ports are not connected to active network devices the LEDs will stay off If the LED display is different than what is described above especially if the Fault and Test LEDs stay on for more than 60 seconds or they start blinking the self test has not completed correctly Refer to the manual you received with the switch for troubleshooting information 3 Power on the Level 1 RAID storage device Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The Power LED goes on and stays on The Service LED stays off 4 Power on K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients Using FTP for file transfer Refer to Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System 52 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Use this chapter to install the K2 Level 2 L2 storage system This chapter includes the following topics e Level 2 system description on page 54 e Preparing level 2 devices on page 55 e Networking for level 2 on
86. then enter the name of the image file you are creating Create the file name using the K2 Media Server hostname and the date Name the file with the tib extension For example if the hostname is K2Server1 in the File name field you would have E K2Serverl 20051027 tib Click Next The Image Archive Splitting page opens 8 Leave the selection at Automatic and then click Next The Compression Level page opens 9 Leave the selection at Normal and click Next The Image Archive Protection page opens 10 You can leave the password fields blank so that no password is required to restore from the image file Click Next The Comment page opens 11 If desired enter image comments such as the date time and software versions contained in the image you are creating Click Next The ready to proceed page opens 12 Verify that you are creating images from the C and D partitions and writing to the E partition Click Proceed The Commit Pending Operations page opens and displays progress 13 When a The image was successfully created message appears click OK 14 Exit the Acronis True Image program The K2 Media Server restarts automatically 15 Remove the Recovery CD while the K2 Media Server is shutting down 16 Upon restart log on to Windows 17 Open Windows Explorer and find the image file on the E partition Creating a recovery disk image CD set Do the following at the local K2 Media Server to creat
87. to 2ms Operating Altitude 15 2m to 3 048m 50ft to 10 000ft Storage Altitude 15 2m to 10 668m 50ft to 35 000ft November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 227 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices K2 Level 1 RAID storage description For the level 1 K2 Storage System the RAID storage device takes the role of both media server and RAID storage The SCSI connection between the media server and the RAID disks is therefore internal only which means no Fibre Channel connections or separate RAID storage devices are required This allows iSCSI clients to connect via the Gigabit Ethernet fabric to the L1 RAID storage device The L1 RAID storage device uses the same chassis as the Grass Valley K2 Media Client product and repurposes components found in that product and in the K2 Media Server to provide the combined functionality required for level 1 K2 storage 6206660 25 60000 005 BOBLSC COR E e le le Ne le E OO0O00U OOOO The L1 RAID storage device includes a Windows operating system PC which runs the media server applications It has one iSCSI interface adapter which provides the Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI media port for the media network The L1 RAID storage device houses 12 internal disk drives and a SCSI RAID adapter The drives are configured as six RAID 1 LUNs of 2 drives each One LUN is the system drive and the other five LUNs provide the shared media storage Fo
88. to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide Click OK The Configuration File dialog box opens 3 On the Configuration File dialog box you can view media file system settings but do not attempt to change them Click Accept A Making new file system Please wait message box displays progress 4 When a message Succeeded to make the new file system appears click OK 5 Restart the K2 Media Server 6 You now have a blank empty file system However the media database still contains references to media files which are no longer present in the file system To clear the media database do the following a In the K2 System Configuration application tree view open the node for the K2 Media Server and select the Database Server node to open its property page b On the Database Server property page click Erase media database A message box displays progress c Wait until a message confirms that the process is complete This can take several minutes d If you have redundant K2 Media Servers repeat these steps to clear the media database on the other redundant server 7 Close Storage Utility 8 Place the K2 Storage System back online November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 287 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Expanding the media file system by capacity NOTE This procedure should only be attempted under the supervision of qualified Grass Valley support pers
89. to the L2 RAID Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or status LED behavior November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 129 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Device Verification instructions Power on the primary K2 Media Server This is the server that Server Control Panel reported was primary when you last powered down Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes the K2 Storage System NOTE Bringing up primary redundant servers in the wrong order can render the system inoperable and result in loss of media Put the primay K2 Media From the K2 System Configuration application open Server Server in service Control Panel and for the primary server click Start Wait until indicators display green for both the file system and the database Power on the backup K2 Media Server This is the server that Server Control Panel reported was backup when you last powered down the K2 Storage System Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complet
90. up Power on K2 Media Server Ethernet cables connected Fibre Channel cable connected Software installed as from the factory Control network IP address assigned Power on L2 RAID chassis Fibre Channel address ID assigned to RAID controller s Fibre Channel cable s connected Ethernet cable s connected Power on L2 RAID Expansion chassis optional Chassis address assigned for Fibre Channel Fibre channel cable s connected Power on 72 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Defining a new K2 Storage System Defining a new K2 Storage System Define a level 2 K2 Storage System as follows 1 On the control point PC open the K2 System Configuration application A login dialog box opens Please enter the administrative account name and password that will be used to configure the K2 sustems User name Password Ok Cancel 2 Log in to the K2 System Configuration application with the Windows adminstrator account By default this as follows e Username administrator e Password adminKk2 Refer to Setting up application security on page 262 for more information about administrator accounts and logging in to applications Jh K2 System Configuration File K2System Device Help Ja i New K2 System Retrieve Configuration 3 Click New K2 System The New K2 System wizard opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 73 Chapter
91. view in the left hand pane and a status information area displayed in the right hand pane The tree view displays the hardware that make up the RAID storage system connected The context menus in the tree view are used to configure storage The right hand status pane displays information about the item selected in the tree view The tree view hierarchy is as follows Controllers in device Provides a logical grouping of the RAID Controllers in a primary RAID chassis Controller Represents the RAID Controllers found These are numbered in the order discovered The controller icon represents both RAID Controller A and 1f installed RAID Controller B To determine if an optional RAID Controller B is installed select the Controller icon in the tree view then examine the status pane for peer status Bound LUNs Expanding the Bound node displays all bound LUNs LUN Represents a bound LUN Expanding the LUN node displays the disk modules that make up the LUN UnBound disks Expanding the UnBound node displays all unbound disk modules 284 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Working on the media file system and database Disks Represents the disk modules The Storage Utility detects disks available and lists them on the opening screen Refer to the following procedures to use Storage Utility for maintenance and configuration tasks Working on the media file system and database Use the procedures in th
92. want to restore another partition or hard disk drive and then click Next The Partition or Disk to Restore page opens Continue with the next step in this procedure 13 Select Database D and then click Next The Restored Partition Location page opens 14 Select Database D and then click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 251 Chapter 9 Managing K2 software The Restored Partition Type page opens 15 Leave the selection at Primary and then click Next The Restored Partition Size page opens 16 Leave settings at their defaults The size reported in the upper pane is the size detected of the actual D partition This should be the same as that reported in the Partition size field in the middle of the page Free space before and Free space after should both be reported at 0 bytes Click Next The Next Selection page opens 17 Select No I do not and then click Next The ready to proceed page opens 18 Verify that you are restoring the correct partition or partitions Click Proceed The Commit Pending Operations page opens and displays progress 19 Insert CDs as prompted If a red X error message is displayed you can safely click OK and continue to insert CDs as prompted 20 When a The image was successfully restored message appears click OK 21 Exit the Acronis True Image program The K2 Media Server restarts automatically 22 Remove any CD currently in the CD d
93. you ever have a D drive fault and you need to recover the data files metadata journal and database you can only restore them to the snap shot contained in the most recent disk image you created When you do this you restore the program files as well e For redundant K2 Storage Systems levels 2R and 3R the media file system program is on the D drive but the metadata and journal files are stored on the shared RAID storage Also the media database program and data files are on the D drive but the data files are replicated to the redundant server Therefore if you ever have a D drive fault you can restore the media file system and database programs from a recovery disk image and then restore the data files November 23 2005 Backup and recovery strategies metadata journal database from their protected locations elsewhere e The E drive is for storing a system image of the other partitions From the E drive you can restore images to the C and D drives When you receive a Level 1 RAID Storage device or a K2 Media Server from the factory the machine has its own default factory image stored on the E drive This image is specific to the individual machine It is not generic for all machines of similar model It contains all the system specific information such as a unique hostname Windows key and MAC addresses From this image you can restore the machine to the same state as when it leaves the factory You recei
94. 00 Non Operational Class 5 Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Transportation Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Equipment Type Information Technology Equipment Class Class 1 Installation Category Category II Local level mains appliances portable equipment etc Pollution Degree Level 2 operating environment indoor use only Adjustable rack mounting ears accommodate different rack depth limitations AN WARNING Always use a grounded outlet to supply power to the system Always use a power cable with a grounded plug such as the one supplied with the system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 229 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices K2 Level 2 RAID storage description The K2 Level 2 RAID Storage is used in Level 2 and Level 2R K2 Storage Systems The RAID storage device is a high performance high availability mass storage system The L2 RAID chassis 2Gb s host interface supports industry standard Fibre Channel technology OO O g E ETE S YA VES XZ L2 RAID Expansion Chassis The L2 RAID chassis utilizes dual FC AL technology allowing two loop configurations within a single chassis Port BypassCircuits have been added to maintain loop integrity during failures without user intervention Each loop and associated Port Bypass Circuits along with all other active components are on redundant separate hot swappable modules With two RAID Controllers the two loo
95. 00 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1 000T Enable 100 1 000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 100 1000T Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Modify Selected Ports 5 Select all ports leave Mode as default of Auto and set Flow Control to Enable 6 Choose VLAN Configuration If prompted log in with the switch s administrator username and password November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 137 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System sw1 Status Non Critical HP J4905A4 ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G igenity Stats Configuration SECY Diagrosics Suppo Device View Fault Detection System Info IP Configuration Port Configuration Monitor Port Device Features Stacking Support Mgmt URL VLAN Type Tagged Ports Untagged Ports Forbid Ports STATIC None i 18 20 Primary N te STATIC None 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 Modify P None ADD REMOVE VLANs C GVRP Enabled GVRP Mode 7 Create anew Media GSCSI VLAN as follows a Click Add Remove VLANs Currrent YLAN Definitions Add Remove VLAN 1 DEFAULT_VLAN Primary 60 Media VLAN Name Media 802 10 VLAN ID 60 Add VLAN New YLAN Name Rename Selected VLAN Set Primary VLAN Remove Selected VLAN s Main Screen b In t
96. 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB oC OD OE First Expansion 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A IB 1C ID IE Second Expansion 40 4 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E Third Expansion 50 51 32 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 SA 5B 5C 5D 5E Fourth Expansion 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E Fifth Expansion 90 9I 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E Sixth Expansion co Cl C2 C3 C4 CS C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE Seventh Expansion DO DI D2 D3 D4 DS D6 D7 D8 DI DA DB DC DD DE In addition Storage Utility s Identify feature allows you to flash the disk LEDs so that you can physically locate a specific disk module or group of disk modules that make up aLUN Always use the disk identify feature before removing and replacing a failed disk module Accidentally removing the wrong disk module can destroy all data on the disk drives To identify RAID disks do the following 1 Open Storage Utility and in the tree view expand all nodes so that all disks are 290 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Get controller logs displayed 2 Open the bezel on the RAID storage chassis or otherwise make sure you can see disk LEDs 3 Identify the disks in a LUN or identify a single disk as follows a In the Storage Utility tree view right click a LUN or right click a single disk then select Identify LUN or Identify Disk in the context menu A message box opens with a message that informs you that a disk or disks ar
97. 1 Nn Nr A W N Restart the K2 Media Server A startup screen displays the message Invalid configuration information Please run setup program Time of day not set Please run setup program Press F2 to enter setup Set the system date and time Select System Setup Integrated Devices Select RAID This also sets ChA and ChB to RAID Restart the K2 Media Server A startup screen displays the message Warning Detected mode change from SCSI to RAID on ChA of the embedded RAID system Select Yes A startup screen displays the message Warning Detected mode change from SCSI to RAID on ChB of the embedded RAID system Select Yes The K2 Media Server restarts as normal When startup completes normal operation is restored 278 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Working with K2 Media Clients Working with K2 Media Clients Use the procedures in this section when doing configuration or service work on a K2 Media Client that is part of an existing K2 Storage System Procedures are as follows e Accessing K2 Media Client features on page 279 e Taking a K2 Media Client offline on page 279 e Taking all K2 Media Clients offline on page 280 e Bringing a K2 Media Client online on page 280 e Shutting down or restarting a K2 Media Client on page 280 e Adding a K2 Media client on page 280 e Removing a K2 Media Client on page 281 e
98. 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 This verifies that the name of the device is being correctly resolved to the IP address which indicates that on the Control Point PC the host table entry 1s correct 5 Ping the other K2 Storage System devices to which you have assigned control network IP addresses 6 Go to each Windows device in the K2 Storage System and repeat this procedure This verifies that network communication is correct to and from all devices November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 107 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Configuring the level 2R storage system Use the topics in this section to do the initial configuration of the level 2R storage system e Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 108 e Defining anew K2 Storage System on page 109 e Configuring the media server Part 1 on page 111 e Configuring RAID on page 113 e Creating a new file system on page 120 e Configuring the media server Part 2 on page 121 Prerequisites for initial configuration Before beginning your initial configuration make sure the devices of the K2 Storage System meet the following prerequisites Refer to sections earlier in this manual for detailed information Also refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices Devices Prerequisite for level 2R configuration Control point PC E
99. 2 Contiguring media Ser Or 2ssiscrerasne e E 165 Adding K2 Storage System clients cccccccccecssesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeesessaaeeeeeeees 167 Basic operations for level 3 storage cccccsssseeeccessececeeeeeeecceseeecsueeeesssaseesessaaes 167 Level 3 power off DroCedUre kent ee 168 Level 3 power on PFOCECUIE cscceecccecceesseeceeecauseececceseauseeceeeseeasaeeeeesssasseeeeess 168 Using FTP tor tile transer corian a a e 169 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Level 3R system description ccccccsssseeececceueeeeeceecaeeaseeeeeeseausceeeesauaaeeeeeessaaaneeess 172 Preparing level 3R GOVICES cccccccssssseceeccceusecececcaeaeeeeeeeeseaaaaeecesseseaaeeeeessnsaaeaes 173 Seting Up the Control pont PC serrian a a a a a 173 Setting up the level 3R redundant GigE switches ccc eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 174 Setting UP the K2 Media Serv r rresia ea E Ta 180 Setting up the L3R RAID chassis cccccccsseesseeeeceeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessaeeeeeeess 181 Preparing K2 Storage System clients cccccccecescesesseeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 186 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral ccccccececcsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeees 187 Networking for level 3 Risici n a a a a 188 Networking reQuireMent cccccsccccccssseecceeeeceeccesseeeceeuseeeeseaseeeessaeeesssaeeeseesanes 188 Networking DS accstiieiee st Geese ore eee eee 18
100. 2005 Adding K2 Storage System clients On this page Do this Database Server Configuration HE Database Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 m Clear media database Click this button to delete all information stored in the media database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized Erase media database the file system M Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version E J Check the media database version lt Back Next gt Cancel You do not need to enter or configure anything on this page Click Next Completing the Click Finish The wizard closes The Level 1 RAID Storage device Configuration Wizard restarts Wait until all startup processes have completed before continuing If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes Your configurations for the level 1 K2 Storage System are complete Adding K2 Storage System clients You can add now clients such as K2 Media Clients or NewsEdits to the K2 Storage System and configure them using the K2 System Configuration application e For NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions e For K2 Media Clients refer to K2 Media Client System Guide for instructions Basic operations for level 1 storage Use the following procedures as you work on your level 1 storage system e Level 1 power off procedure e Level 1
101. 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 239 Chapter amp Overview of K2 Storage Tools 240 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter g Managing K2 software This chapter provides information about the software components of the K2 Storage System Topics include the following e About K2 software e Installing K2 software e Backup and recovery strategies About K2 software The primary software installations for the K2 Storage System and K2 products are as follows This Is distributed With the installation file Which is software on located at installed on And is described as follows K2 Client The K2 System K2Client setup exe K2 Media Provides core functionality for all Software CD Clients K2 Media Client models including SD only SD HD internal storage and external storage models K2 Server The K2 System K2Server setup exe K2 Media Provides core functionality for all Software CD Servers K2 Media Servers in all roles Control Point The K2 System ControlPoint setup exe Control Point Provides remote control and Software CD PCs configuration of K2 Media Clients both internal and external storage as well as the K2 Storage System NetCentral The NetCentral ServerSetup exe The NetCentral Provides remote monitoring of all Manager CD server PC this K2 products can be a Control Point PC In addition the following software is installed i
102. 3 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 171 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System 172 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Level 3R system description Multiple iSCSI clients PIPSN ll od Pi tl E SEOs Szo TER 50 5 Q 5 025 0 5 0 5 zoz zogo 7mo oD 6 Svo oro Gigabit Ethernet ATUL a BILL switches dl 01 U00 Rpa eipey O 78 oo Us Q eo e D DD i I PIpoy 2 dia OU0D eipal jou09 04 U0D I dis O1JU0D K2 media oo cB E Ene 2B servers Fibre Channel connections L3R RAID chassis L3R RAID Expansion chassis optional The level three redundant Level 3R storage system has four K2 media servers They are configured as two redundant pairs In this diagram media servers 1A and 2A each take on a subset of the media server roles For example server 1A takes the roles of media file system server database server and iSCSI bridge while server 2A takes the roles of FTP server NAS server and iSCSI bridge The four media servers provide a total of four iSCSI media connections for increased bandwidth Media server 1B is the redundant server to 1A Media server 2B is the redundant server to 2B In addition the level three redundant storage system has one L3R RAID chassis Up
103. 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Follow the on screen text to define your level 2 K2 Storage System as described in the following table On this page Do this Page 1 Fl New K2 System Page 1 E x Welcome to the New K2 System Wizard This wizard defines the type and number of devices on your K2 system Name Enter a name for the K2 system System configuration C Level Select the type of K2 system you are creating Level 2 C Level 3 C Custom C Nearline Server redundancy IT Check this option if this system has failover capabilities lt Back Cancel Create a name for your level 2 K2 Storage System and type it in the Name box Select Level 2 Leave the Server redundancy option unchecked Click Next Page 2 HE New K2 system Page 2 E x 10 16 40 145 Device Assignment For the standard configurations the number of servers and switches is fixed Define the number of clients on this K2 system by selecting the appropriate device type and clicking the Select button Available device types Number of devices K2 Media Server K2 Media Server Ethernet Switch Ethernet Switch K2 Media Client K2 Media Client Generic iSCSI Client K2 Media Client Fibre Channel Switch lt Remove K2 Media Client oe K2 Media Client lt Back Next gt Cancel Move clients into the Number of Devices box as appropriate for your system You cannot change the
104. 4 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Client Configuration This media server does not function as a file system server It does function as a file system client which is validated from this page File System Server Configuration ots gt ES MS M Storage and shared file system server configuration K Launch Storage Utility Note There is already a primary file system on this SAN You do not need to launch Storage Utility to create a file system The application will automatically configure the file system on this server Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure the storage system and file system M Shared file system client configuration fh DOSES MT SEEE File system server 1 File system server 2 File system client parameters Unconfigured lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration check is successful click Next If you get a The V will not be ava
105. 8 100 8 1 PC root_client_1 iSCSI client 192 168 100 111 192 168 99 111 Redundant root_client 2 iSCSI client 192 168 100 121 192 168 99 121 Ports share a teamed IP root_client_3 iSCSI client 192 168 100 131 192 168 99 131 address root_client_4 iSCSI client 192 168 100 141 192 168 99 141 This IP address must resolve to hostname root_server_1_he0 b This IP address must resolve to hostname root_server_2 heO Setting up host tables The hosts file is used by the network to determine the IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name hostname is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 105 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System on Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server operating system computers If you include the names and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other K2 devices instead of editing the hosts file on each K2 device Add the _he0 suffix to hostnames associated with FTP Streaming ports Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for more information If transferring to or from a Profile XP or Open SAN system via UIM the hosts file must also follow UIM naming conventions for those systems Refer to the UIM Instruction Manual To edit the hosts file manually 1 Open the following f
106. 9 Seting UD NOSE ADIOS seia a e a 190 Testing the control network ccceeccccceeseeecceseeeeceeeeeceseuseeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeessenseeseees 190 Configuring the level 3R Storage SYSOM cccccceceeeccseeseeeeeeeeeeesssessaeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 192 Prerequisites for initial CONFIQUIATION cccsececcesseeceeeeeeeeceeseeecseeseeeesenseeseaees 192 Defining a new K2 Storage System ccccccccccsecseeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeees 193 Configuring the media server 1A Part 1 ccccccccccccceeseseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeeess 195 ONION RAID oot cs ei cease eke te cs te oe ee ta Nh 197 Creating a new file system cccccccccccccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeesessaeaeeseceeeeeeeeeesessaaeeneeees 204 Configuring the media server 1A Part 2 cccccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaseeeeees 205 Configuring the redundant media Server 1B ccccccecsssseesseeeeeeeeeeceseaeeeeeeeees 208 Configuring media Server 2A irri a iawn E E 211 Configuring the redundant media server 2B cccccceceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeesessaeeseeeess 214 Adding K2 Storage System clients ccccccccccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeseeeeeeeeeeesessaeeseeeeees 217 Basic operations for level 3R StOrage cccccssseseecceeseeeesseeeeeceaeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeessages 218 Level 3R power off procedure cccccccsessecceeeceeeseeceeeecaueueeesessauaeeeeeesesnseeeeess 218 Level 3R power on procedure mecisees cee dee tics
107. C terminal program and disconnect the console cable Continue with the next procedure Configuring the GigE switch VLANs Configuring the GigE switch VLANs The following steps are for the HP ProCurve switch Accomplish tasks similarly on a Cisco switch 136 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 3 GigE switch 1 From the control point PC or another PC make sure that you have a direct Ethernet cable connection to the switch with no other switches or networking devices in between 2 On the PC open Internet Explorer and type the switch s IP address in the Address field as in the following example http 192 168 100 61 This should be the name or IP address as currently configured on the switch 3 Press Enter to open the switch s configuration application NOTE The configuration application for the HP ProCurve switch requires Java You can also access the switch s configuration application from the K2 System Configuration application 4 In the switch s configuration application choose Configuration then Port Configuration sw Status Non Critical HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G entity Stats Configuration SECY Dagnosics SUppo4ri Device View Fault Detection System Info IP Configuration Monitor Port _Device Features Stacking VLAN Configuration Support Mgmt URL Enabled Config Flow Mode Control 100 1000T Enable 100 1 000T Enable 1
108. C that you own and install the required software For either option you must do the following for the control point PC that runs the K2 System Configuration application e Assign a control network IP address to the PC Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Connect the PC to the GigE control network To use your own PC you must additionally do the following e Verify that the PC that meets the following system requirements You might have to install some supporting software e Microsoft Windows XP e 400 MB hard disk space Professional Service Pack 2 e Minimum 512 MB RAM 1 GB e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 recommended e Graphics acceleration with at least e Java JRE 1 3 1_12 and 1 4 2_05 128 MB memory This is required for the HP Ethernet e Pentium 4 or higher class processor Switch configuration interface 2 GHz or greater e Install the Control Point software Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software e Install and license NetCentral server software You can install this on the the November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 133 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System NetCentral server PC which can be the K2 configuration control point PC Refer to the NetCentral User Guide Also refer to Control point PC description on page 224 Setting up the level 3 GigE switch These procedures are for the HP ProCurve switch If you are using the Cisco Catalyst switch make connections and sett
109. CP enabled by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the Modify button Port MAC Address IP Address Subnet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 125 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System 126 On this page Do this File System Server Configuration This page checks on the configuration of the media server in one of its main roles as a file system server The media server also functions as a file system client which is also checked from this page It is not necessary to bind LUNS or create a file system since this task was completed when you configured the previous media server File System Server Configuration oteDES MS M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure Launch Storage Utility the storage system and file system lt Note There is
110. Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next Network Configuration This page displays the control network Ethernet port and allows you to configure the FTP Streaming network Ethernet port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports For Level 3R since this server does not take the role of FTP server configuring the second port here for the FTP streaming network is not required S Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 E x M Network Configuration The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device You can modify the IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the Modify button YS Port DHCP MAC Address IP Address Subnet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify
111. Configuration Monitor Port Device Features Stacking VLAN Configuration Support Mgmt URL Enabled Config Flow Mode Control 100 1 000T Yes Enable 100 14 000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 100 1 000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 100 1000T Yes Enable 4100 1 000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 100 1 000T Yes Enable 100 1 000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 10071000T Yes Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Modify Selected Parts November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 95 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System 5 Select all ports leave Mode as default of Auto and set Flow Control to Enable 6 Choose VLAN Configuration If prompted log in with the switch s administrator username and password sw Status Non Critical HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G SUppon Configuration SeCHIIY Diagnostics identity Stats Device View Fault Detection System Info IP Configuration Port Configuration Monitor Port Device Features Stacking Support Mgmt URL VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type Tagged Ports Untagged Ports Forbid Ports STATIC None DEFAULT_VLAN STATIC GVRP ee one Modity amp Primary Hone STATIC None 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1517 Modify P None None ADD REMOVE VLANs GVRP Enabled GVRP
112. Controller Bound Number of LUNs LUN Binding Type such as RAID 1 State online or offline Disk Firmware Vendor State Product ID Capacity Unbound Number of disks K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 289 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Checking controller microcode As explained in the previous section to check controller microcode in Storage Utility select the controller in the tree view and the microcode version is displayed Identifying disks When you do maintenance or service work on your RAID storage it is important for many tasks that you positively identify the disk or disks on which you are working Your primary indicators for this are the numbering of the disks in Storage Utility and the ability to flash the disk LED on a physical disk or a group of disks Disk numbering in Storage Utility uses the following conventions e Level 2 RAID disks are numbered with a normal decimal sequence starting with zero 0 1 2 3 etc However it is important to note that there is no disk 15 The primary RAID chassis contains disks 0 through 14 while the Expansion Chassis contains disks 16 through 30 e Level 3 RAID disks are numbered with a hexadecimal convention as follows Chassis Disk number number XY s Disk51 N For example in Expansion Chassis five disk one Chassis Disk numbers from left to right facing chassis front Primary 00 Ol 02 03
113. Controllert In progress 16 48 45 Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 48 52 cas Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 48 55 eee Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 07 fre Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 75 ere Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 23 ere f Close the Progress Report and repeat these steps for other unbound disks If specified by your system design you can bind some disks as Hot Spares as explained in Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 When you are done if you did not bind any extra Hot Spares you should have the following results For level three redundant storage on the primary RAID chassis you should have two RAID 1 LUNs of two disks each one Hot Spare Disk and two RAID 5 LUNs of five disks each For each optional Expansion chassis you would have an additional three RAID 5 LUNs of five disks each NOTE L3R RAID controllers can take several hours to bind a LUN Make sure you initiate multiple simultaneous binding processes to reduce the overall time g Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window NOTE Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding 4 Restart the K2 Media Server 5 Continue with the next procedure Creating a new file system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 203 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Creating a new file system 1 In Storage Utility click Tools Make New Fil
114. E This Database Server is primary This Database Server is backup Database Replication ts running Stark Stop Stark Stop is the backup FSM K eerverl is the primary FSM K2servernc If your K2 Storage System has redundant servers both panels two servers appear NOTE Do not click Stop or Start unless you intend to manually control the current primary redundant roles Using these buttons can trigger an automatic system recovery failover event To launch Server Control Panel in the the K2 System Configuration application click the Server Control Panel button Server Control Panel You can also launch Server Control Panel on the local K2 Media Server When you do so you must log in with administrator level privileges Refer to procedures in Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System to use Server Control Panel for maintenance service and other tasks Storage Utility You should be aware that there are two versions of Storage Utility e Storage Utility for the K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 237 Chapter amp Overview of K2 Storage Tools e Storage Utility for internal storage K2 Media Client models only This section explains Storage Utility for the K2 Storage System Refer to the K2 System Guide to learn about Storage Utility for internal storage K2 Media Client models NOTE Do not run Storage Utility on an external storage
115. Edits are accessing the level 3R storage system e K2 Level 3 RAID storage device provider e Grass Valley PC Monitoring software installed This software must be installed on the K2 configuration control point PC It includes Grass Valley SNMP agents and other WMI based components to perform process monitoring This provides the information for some of the SNMP trap messages that must be sent to NetCentral e Control point PC monitored by NetCentral The K2 configuration control point PC must be added to the NetCentral system and fully monitored by NetCentral This especially means that its SNMP trap destination is set to send SNMP traps to the NetCentral server PC This is critical as a SNMP trap is used as the mechanism by which the K2 configuration information is communicated to NetCentral Whether the control point PC and the NetCentral server PC are the same PC or are different PCs you must still add the control point PC to NetCentral In addition NetCentral automatically changes its view of the K2 Storage System whenever you use the K2 System Configuration application to do one of the following e Remove a K2 Storage System e Rename a K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 187 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Add a device to a K2 Storage System Remove a device from a K2 Storage System Refer to the NetCentral User Guide to set up the NetCentral system After install
116. Gigabit Ethernet ports for control and a pair for media Each port of a redundant pair is connected to a different switch The GigE switches are configured with V LANs to keep the control FTP and media iSCSI traffic separate Each K2 Media Server has two GigE connections for media one GigE connection for control one GigE connection for FTP and one Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage The media server hosts iSCSI interface cards for the GigE media connections and a Fibre Channel card for the RAID storage connection The iSCSI interface cards provide a bridge between GigE iSCSI and Fibre Channel SCSI The media server also hosts software components that allow it to function in various roles including media file system manager media database server and FTP server Redundant K2 Media Servers are connected by a serial cable which suppports the heartbeat signal required for automatic system recovery failover features The L2 RAID chassis has redundant RAID controllers to support the Fibre Channel connections from the media servers The L2 RAID chassis is also connected to the GigE control network which is required for SNMP NetCentral monitoring 90 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Preparing level 2R devices On the L2 RAID chassis there are two RAID 1 LUNs for media file system metadata files and journal files The remainder of the RAID storage is RAID 3 LUNs for media The K2 configuration control point
117. I Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapters and the page validates that the Fibre Channel adapter is in place and that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HBliSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge Primary Backup iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed O0cOdd012124 192 168 100 10 255 255 255 0 OMB sec O0cOdd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMBsec Modify View Target Drives Check Grass Valley Disk Adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GV Fibre Channel adapter iSCSI adapter For level 2 redundant select Primary Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter Click Check The Validation Report opens Am validation Report x y iSCSI adapter was detected v Fibre Channel adapter was detected x AILSCSI ports have been configured Conf
118. I clients to the K2 Storage System must be prepared with the following requirements e One or more connections to the control network e A static IP address for the control network e One or more connections to the media SCSI network Additional steps that are required for NewsEdits include the following e Implement NewsEdit security features For more information refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide Additional steps that are required for K2 Media Clients include the following 102 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral e If the K2 Media Client connects to the K2 Storage System with a redundant Ethernet fabric such as in Levels 2R and 3R install Multi path I O software For more information refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral As you configure the K2 Storage System information is automatically sent to NetCentral When NetCentral receives the information it adds devices and populates its interface with a view of the K2 Storage System Before you begin using the K2 System Configuration application to configure the storage system you must set up the NetCentral system according to the following requirements e NetCentral installed NetCentral server software must be installed on a NetCentral server PC This can be the K2 configuration control point PC or another PC that has network communication with
119. ID 60 Untagged No VLAN NAME Untagged Me MODE z Untagged No Untagged No Untagged No Untagged No oN One UN l a Select All Apply Cancel Select all the odd numbered ports Tip Use Ctrl Click In the Mode drop down list select Untagged then click Apply This removes the odd ports from the default Control VLAN In the Current Mode list box scroll down and select the trunks In the Mode drop down list select Tagged then click Apply This allows the trunks to carry traffic from either VLAN Click the VLAN Configuration tab a In the DEFAULT_VLAN row click Modify b In the Current Mode list box scroll down and select the trunks c In the Mode drop down list select Tagged then click Apply This allows the trunks to carry traffic from either VLAN K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 179 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System d Click the VLAN Configuration tab 10 On the VLAN Configuration page verify that for both VLANS the trunks are displayed in the Tagged Ports column 11 Repeat this procedure for the other Ethernet switch 12 Close the switch configuration application Setting up the K2 media server Do the following to prepare each K2 media server e Install the server in its permanent location Refer to the rack mount instructions that you received with the server s product bundle e Provide power to the servers e Connect cables as
120. K2 Media SELVES ccccceeeseeeecececeeeeeeaeeeseseeeeeeeeeeesssasaueeeeeeeeeess 139 Setting up the L3 RAID ChasSiS ccccccceeccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssesaeaeeeeeseeeeeess 140 Preparing K2 Storage System ClENtS cceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeaeeeeeees 144 Sending K2 configuration to NetCenttal cccceccccccccceeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseseeaseeeees 145 Networking for level 3 cccccsseccccssseececesseeecceeececeeeeeeeceasseeeseuseceessagseeessnaseesssaaeeess 147 Networking TEQUINEMENIS lt pecssicn igs seh cwcascw n e AEEA 147 INCTWOPKIN GDS Sciatic set than sc oeeee A a sesame cee eee see a eemex aces ee oee T 148 SeN UD MOST LASS neonne a a ee Gece tutesiatandsl 148 Testing the control NetWork wasn citecetdeeketeees te eee hn ce eral eee aun Lee 149 Configuring the level 3 Storage system cccccccseseeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeeeess 151 Prerequisites for initial configuration ccccceseeeeceesseeeceeeeesceuseeeceuaeeeeesaaeess 151 Defining a new K2 Storage SySteM cccccccssseesssseeceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeesesaeaas 152 November 23 2005 Configuring the media Server Part 1 ssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaees 154 Configuring RAID z ren etch sree eiae a ea a aa Re eieaa 156 Creanga NEW ile System assina t a 161 Configuring the media server Part 2 cccccceseseeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseaesaeeeeess 16
121. LUN on Contraller0 E progress 1648 45 Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 48 52 Binding LUN on Contraller0 In progress 16 48 55 eee Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 49 07 fre Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 75 ere Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 23 ere f Close the Progress Report and repeat these steps for other unbound disks If specified by your system design you can bind some disks as Hot Spares as explained in Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 When you are done if you did not bind any extra Hot Spares you should have the following results For level three storage you should have three RAID 5 LUNs of five disks each ona RAID storage device For each optional Expansion chassis you would have an additional three RAID 5 LUNs of five disks each NOTE L3 RAID controllers can take several hours to bind a LUN Make sure you initiate multiple simultaneous binding processes to reduce the overall time g Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window NOTE Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding 3 Restart the K2 Media Server 4 Continue with the next procedure Creating a new file system 160 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Creating a new file system Creating a new file system 1 In Storage Utility click Tools Make New File System The Setting dialog box opens mv Settings Please enter the number ot
122. MXF 257 N name resolution 37 69 104 147 188 November 23 2005 NAS server 127 211 217 NetCentral 35 67 103 145 187 238 license 27 55 92 133 174 NetCentral Administrator 262 NetCentral Manager CD 241 NetCentral software 241 NetCentral Technician 262 NetCentral User 262 Network Configuration 45 77 113 156 197 Networking requirements 36 69 104 147 188 NewsEdits 37 49 69 82 104 120 147 161 188 204 266 287 P partitions 246 Password 262 PC Monitoring software 36 67 103 145 187 PFC500 E defined 231 233 PFR700 replacing failed disk 296 ping command 39 71 106 149 190 ports 264 power cords certification 11 power off K2 Storage System 51 86 128 168 218 power on K2 Storage System 52 86 129 168 219 primary backup roles 128 218 270 product damage precautions 9 Proxy NAS 263 Q Quicktime 245 R RAID 228 RAID 1 116 200 RAID chassis address 64 100 142 184 RAID Controller 230 284 RAID description level 1 228 level 2 230 level 3 232 RAID diagnostic cabling 63 99 RAID diagnostic ID switches 64 100 RAID Ethernet 63 99 141 183 November 23 2005 RAID Expansion Chassis 231 233 Real Time Input Output RTIOs rate 287 Real Time Input Output RTIO rate 48 82 120 161 204 recovery 246 recovery CD 247 replacing failed disk PFR700 296 Retrieve Configuration 268 roles K2 Media Server level 1 44 level 2 76 level 2R 112 level 3 155 level 3R 196
123. Media Drives 1 44MB Floppy Drive 24X IDE CD RW DVD ROM Drive Communications Dual Embedded Intel Gigabit 82541 Server Adapter on motherboard Graphics ATI Radeon with 16MB SDRAM Form Factor 2U Dimensions with bezel 75 68 cm 29 79 D x 44 7 cm 17 6 W x 8 656 cm 3 38 H Rack Weight 26 76kg 59 Ib maximum configuration Rack Mount Sliding rails with rack ear kit K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 K2 Media Server specifications Characteristic Specification Rear Ports Two RJ 45 one 9 pin serial two Universal Serial Bus USB 2 0 Video PS 2 mouse PS 2 keyboard ID push button with blue amber LED RJ 45 for optional DRAC 4 I management controller Front Ports Two Universal Serial Bus USB 2 0 ID push button with blue amber LED 15 pin video system power on off button Power 700W hot plug redundant power 110 220 Volts Cooling Hot plug redundant cooling fans Operating Temperature 10 to 35 C 50 to 95 F Storage Temperature 40 to 65 C 40 to 149 F Operating Relative Humidity 20 to 80 non condensing Storage Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Operating Vibration 0 25G at 3Hz to 200Hz for 15 minutes Storage Vibration 1 54Grms at 10Hz to 250Hz for 15 minutes Operating Shock 1 shock pulse of 41G for up to 2ms Storage Shock 6 shock pulses of 71G for up
124. Mode 7 Create anew Media GSCSI VLAN as follows a Click Add Remove VLANs Currrent VLAN Definitions Add Remove VLAN 1 DEFAULT_YLAN Primary 60 Media VLAN Name Media 802 10 VLAN ID E Add VLAN New VLAN Name Rename Selected VLAN Set Primary YLAN Remove Selected VLAN s Main Screen b In the VLAN Name field enter Media c In the VLAN ID field enter 60 d Click Add VLAN e Click Main Screen to return to VLAN Configuration 8 Configure the Media VLAN as follows a In the Media VLAN row click Modify 96 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the K2 media server Modify Port VLAN Configuration Port Current Mode VLAN ID Untagged No VLAN NAME Untagged Untagged MODE No Untagged No 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 Untagged No Untagged No Select All Apply Cancel b Select all the odd numbered ports Tip Use Ctrl Click c In the Mode drop down list select Untagged then click Apply This removes the odd ports from the default Control VLAN d In the Current Mode list box scroll down and select the trunks e In the Mode drop down list select Tagged then click Apply This allows the trunks to carry traffic from either VLAN f Click the VLAN Configuration tab 9 Configure the default Control VLAN as follows a In the DEFAULT_VLAN row click Modify b In the Current Mode list box scroll down and select the trunks
125. Ov grass valley K aIM STORAGE SYSTEM O onsas NOVEMBER 2005 DOOOQOQOO OOO OOOO C OOO OOO OOOO 0 0 O PDOOOOQOAOAOAAOAOOC LIL QOOOOG mneetwteratwananice CEE ee A 3 THOMSON BRAND 2 Copyright Trademarks Disclaimer U S Government Restricted Rights Legend Revision Status Copyright 2005 Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced except as specifically permitted under U S copyright law without the prior written consent of Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 Grass Valley M Series K2 Profile and Profile XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the associated products Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Additional information regarding Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc trademarks and other proprietary rights may be found at www thomsongrassvalley com Product options and specifications subject to change without notice The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only is sub
126. P address of K2 Media server 1B This is the redundant partner of the server you are now configuring Click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 207 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System On this page Do this Completing the Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Wait Configuration Wizard until all startup processes have completed before continuing If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes Configuring the redundant media server 1B You must wait for the primary media server to restart before continuing To verify from the control point PC open the MS DOS command prompt and use the ping command For level 3 redundant after you have configured the first media server server 1A you next configure its redundant partner media server server 1B 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the media server you are configuring as server IB 2 Click the Configure button The Configure K2 Storage System Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the server for a level 3R K2 Storage System as described in the following table Some screens require no input from you as they are based on the configurations already completed on a previously configured media server On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles E x m Hostname
127. PC servers Fibre Channel connections L3 RAID chassis L3 RAID Expansion chassis optional iii Ti The level three storage system has two K2 media servers between which the media server roles are distributed Typically one media server runs as the media file system and database server while the other media server runs as the FTP server This boosts performance as the system resources of each server can be optimized for specific roles In addition both servers take the role of iSCSI bridge so that there are a total of four iSCSI media connections for increased bandwidth The level three storage system has one L3 RAID chassis Up to seven optional Expansion chassis are available for increased storage capacity K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are connected to the GigE switch Each client has one GigE connection for media and one GigE connection for control The GigE switch is configured with V LANSs to keep the traffic on these connections separate Each K2 Media Server has two GigE connections for media one GigE connection for control one GigE connection for FTP and one Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage The media server hosts iSCSI interface cards for the GigE media connections and a Fibre Channel card for the RAID storage connection The iSCSI interface cards provide a bridge between GigE 1SCSI and Fibre Channel SCSI Eac
128. PC is connected to the GigE control network The K2 System Configuration application runs on this PC for configuring the storage system Refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices for more information Preparing level 2R devices Use the topics in this section to prepare each device so that it is ready to become part of the level 2R storage system e Setting up the control point PC on page 91 e Setting up the level 2R redundant GigE switches on page 92 e Setting up the K2 media server on page 97 e Setting up the L2 RAID chassis on page 98 e Preparing K2 Storage System clients on page 102 Setting up the control point PC To set up the K2 configuration control point PC you have the following options e Use the Grass Valley control point PC that comes from the factory with software pre installed This includes the K2 System Configuration application remote AppCenter and NetCentral software e Use a PC that you own and install the required software For either option you must do the following for the control point PC that runs the K2 System Configuration application e Assign a control network IP address to the PC Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Connect the PC to the GigE control network To use your own PC you must additionally do the following e Verify that the PC that meets the following system requirements You might have to install some supporting software e Micro
129. RAID type For Level 2 RAID you can select RAID 1 or RAID 3 For Level 3 RAID you can select RAID 1 or RAID 5S Refer to the installation chapter earlier in this document for your level of storage system for specific instructions 4 In the Available Disks box select contiguous disks at the top of the list as appropriate for the RAID type TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 293 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System 5 Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive LED to flash 6 Click OK to close the Bind LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process 7 Close the Progress Report and repeat these steps for other unbound disks NOTE RAID controllers can take several hours to bind a LUN Make sure you initiate multiple simultaneous binding processes to reduce the overall time 8 Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window 9 Restart the K2 Media Server Binding Hot Spare drives You can bind disks as hot spare drives Hot spare drives are on standby and are used in the event of a drive failure in a LUN If a drive fails the RAID Controller
130. RTOs T Windows Security OF Cancel 2 For the Real Time Input Output RTIO rate enter the value specified by your system design If you do not know this value contact your Grass Valley representative 3 If the K2 Storage System is to be accessed by only K2 Media Clients you can leave Windows Security unchecked If accessed by NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions 4 Click OK The Configuration File dialog box opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 161 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System A Configuration File ae A O x select Accept to acceptthe contiquration file Cancel to abort making new file system Edt to editthe configuration file HA global section for defining file system wide parameters H SAE SAE SRE SAE SAS SAE tittet tt taaa aaa aaa aa aaa atatt GlobalSuperU zer Windows ecurity lnodeE xpandMin lnodeE xpandinc lnodeE xpandM ax Se Se 52 33 38 58 Debug ButferCacheS ize JournalSize FsBlock Size Allocations trategy Seo a Accept Cancel Edit The configuration file for the media file system is displayed You can verify media file system parameters by viewing this file Do not edit this file Click Accept A Please wait message box displays progress and a succeeded message confirms the process is complete 5 A message informs you that you must restart the
131. Rename Selected VLAN Set Primary VLAN Remove Selected VLAN s Main Screen b In the VLAN Name field enter Media c In the VLAN ID field enter 60 d Click Add VLAN e Click Main Screen to return to VLAN Configuration 8 Configure the Media VLAN as follows a In the Media VLAN row click Modify 60 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the K2 media server Modify Port VLAN Configuration Port Current Mode VLAN ID 60 Untagged No VLAN NAME Media Untagged Untagged MODE No Untagged No Untagged No Untagged No Select All Apply Cancel 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 b Select all the odd numbered ports Tip Use Ctrl Click c In the Mode drop down list select Untagged then click Apply This removes the odd ports from the default Control VLAN d Click the VLAN Configuration tab 9 Close the switch configuration application Setting up the K2 media server Do the following to prepare the K2 media server e Install the server in its permanent location Refer to the rack mount instructions that you received with the server s product bundle e Provide power to the server e Connect cables as follows ISCO interface Cards GigE media Fibre Channel GD omo omo O G 06 E Ea cea ca a ey so EL Keyboard M ower Serial port VGA monitor FTP ental ues o
132. System Configuration on page 235 e Server Control Panel on page 237 e Storage Utility on page 237 e NetCentral on page 238 K2 System Configuration The K2 System Configuration application K2 Config is the primary tool for configuring the K2 Storage System Once the devices of the storage system are cabled and are communicating on the control network you can do all the configuration required to create a working K2 Storage System using the K2 System Configuration application After your K2 Storage System is initially installed and configured as instructed in the installation chapters earlier in this manual if you need to reconfigure the system you should do so using the K2 System Configuration Application While some reconfiguration tasks can be accomplished without using the K2 System Configuration Application it is not recommended Using the K2 System Configuration Application enforces consistent policy and sequencing for reconfiguration tasks which makes the system easier to maintain and aids in troubleshooting should a problem arise The K2 System Configuration application runs on a control point PC and accesses the devices of the K2 Storage System via the control network You can configure the devices of the K2 Storage System as follows e K2 Media Client and K2 Media Server These devices are configured directly by the K2 System Configuration application e K2 Level 2 RAID and Level 3 RAID storage devices
133. This can be the K2 configuration control point PC or another PC that has network communication with the K2 Storage System control network e Device providers installed A device provider must be installed on the NetCentral server PC for each type of device in the K2 Storage System For a level 2 storage system the following device providers must be installed e Control point PC device provider This is the Windows monitoring device provider e K2 Media Server device provider e HP Gigabit Switch device provider or Cisco Gigabit Switch device provider e K2 Media Client device provider if any K2 Media Clients are accessing the level 2 storage system e Device provider for iSCSI clients if any iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are accessing the level 2 storage system e K2 Level 2 RAID storage device provider e Grass Valley PC Monitoring software installed This software must be installed on the K2 configuration control point PC It includes Grass Valley SNMP agents and other WMI based components to perform process monitoring This provides the information for some of the SNMP trap messages that must be sent to NetCentral e Control point PC monitored by NetCentral The K2 configuration control point PC must be added to the NetCentral system and fully monitored by NetCentral This especially means that its SNMP trap destination is set to send SNMP traps to the NetCentral server PC This is critical as a SNMP trap is used as the m
134. Utility to configure the storage and file system Leave the Configure K2 Server wizard open while you are using Storage Utility When you are done with Storage Utility you continue with the wizard as explained in Configuring the media server Part 2 on page 121 Configuring RAID Use Storage Utility to complete the configuration of the L2 RAID chassis as explained in the following topics November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 113 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System e Configuring L2 RAID network and SNMP settings e Binding disk modules Refer to Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 108 to confirm that the RAID storage is ready for configuration Configuring L2 RAID network and SNMP settings Use the Storage Utility to configure the following settings for the level 2R RAID chassis e IP address e Subnet mask e Gateway Address e SNMP trap destinations For level 2R RAID network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the RAID LAN card Therefore the combined RAID storage devices including the one or two RAID controllers and the optional Expansion chassis is a single entity on the control network In addition the RAID storage device is configured by default for the SNMP community name public If your site s policies require using a different SNMP community name contact your Grass Valley representative To configure these settings do the following
135. a Client features c ccccccccsssseeeceecseesseeeeeeseueeseeeeesaaaeeeeess 279 Taking a K2 Media Client offline ccccccsseseccccccseeseeeeeeceeeseeeecseeaeaeseeeesasaaeeess 279 Taking all K2 Media Clients offline 2 0 ccc cccccccccccsseeceecceeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeesssaeeeess 280 Bringing a K2 Media Client online cccccccccsssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaaas 280 Shutting down or restarting a K2 Media Client ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 280 November 23 2005 Adding a K2 Media ClO scien sndechecins hase encanta cereale eences 280 Removing a K2 Media Client ccceccccccsesseeeeeeecaeeeeceeeesaeaeeeeeeeesesaaeeeeeeessaaaeees 281 Identifying K2 Media Client Software VersiOns ccccccceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 282 Modifying K2 Media Client control network settings cccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 Modifying K2 Media Client media network settings cccccccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 Modifying load balancing siec a a a eeid mn leeu elec ans 283 BEST gle fee Co cc 6 28 Uul aese ireeee eee eet tole eee PR ee ee eee ere ee eee eee ee eee ee 283 Accessing Storage Uiilily 2ic6c hex O a eG iets 283 Overview Of Storage Utility seeni snn a a a e aae 284 Working on the media file system and database ccccccsssseecceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeens 285 Checking the media file system ccccceccecseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
136. a K2 system with the following information Name 10 16 40 145 Configuration Level X eceu K2 system Number of servers x Number of switches x Number of clients X When you click Finish a tree view will be created showing the devices on your K2 system Click the Configure button to configure each device All servers must be configured before any clients lt Back Cancel Review the information on this page and verify that you have correctly defined your K2 Storage System For a level 3 storage system you should have the following e One Gigabit Ethernet switch e Two K2 Media Servers e The number and type of clients appropriate for your system Click Finish The Define New K2 Storage System wizard closes Your K2 Storage System appears in the tree view of the K2 System Configuration application Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server Part 1 Configuring the media server Part 1 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select PrimaryK2Server Prima Serer i 2 Click the Configure button Configure The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the media server for a level 3 K2 Storage November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 1 System as described in the following table On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles 4 j x
137. a general description CAUTION Use the Storage Utility only as directed by a documented AN procedure or by Grass Valley Support If used improperly the Storage Utility can render your K2 Storage System inoperable or result in the loss of all your media The installation chapters earlier in this document provide instructions for using Storage Utility as you initially set up and configure a level 1 through level 3 redundant K2 Storage System You should refer to those instructions for information that is specific to the level of your K2 Storage System Procedures in this section are as follows e Accessing Storage Utility on page 283 e Overview of Storage Utility on page 284 Accessing Storage Utility To access the Storage Utility you must open it from within the K2 System Configuration application Access permissions are passed from the K2 System Configuration application to the Storage Utility as it opens so make sure that you are logged in with sufficient permissions You open the Storage Utility from within the K2 System Configuration application in the following ways e In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree Then click the Storage Utility button Storage Utility opens In this case the connection to the RAID storage devices is via the K2 Media Server first configured which is designated as server 1 server A or s
138. ace bar to select the Manual option 28 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 1 GigE switch 7 Tab to the IP Address field and enter the switch s control network IP address Refer to Networking tips on page 32 8 Tab to the Subnet Mask field and enter the subnet mask used for your network 9 Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 1 From the main menu choose Console Passwords and press Enter The Set Password Menu opens 2 Chose Set Manager Password and press Enter 09 Enter a password You can use the default K2 administrator password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System Return to the main menu Tab to Command Line CLI and press Enter The command prompt appears Type configure to change to configuration mode a S i You now configure an administrator username You can use the default K2 administrator username K2admin or your site s username for administering the K2 Storage System For example to set the username to K2admin type the following password manager user name K2admin 10 When prompted for the password enter a password You can use the default K2 password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 8 Decide your SNMP community na
139. add a K2 Media Client to an existing K2 Storage System do the following 1 In the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree 2 Click Add Device The Add Device dialog box opens Add Device Add Device Select one of the following devices to add to this system C K2 Media Server C Ethemet Switch C Fibre Channel Switch C K2 Media Client iSCSI Client Cancel 3 Select the K2 Media Client 4 Click OK The new client device appears in the tree view 5 Configure the K2 Media Client as appropriate Removing a K2 Media Client The requirements for removing a K2 Media Client from an existing K2 Storage System are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e Media access must be stopped on the K2 Media Client you are removing e You can remove a K2 Media Client without disrupting the operation of the rest of the storage system To remove a K2 Media Client do the following 1 Stop media access on the K2 Media Client To do this you can select the K2 Media Client and click Take Offlline 2 In the tree view select K2 Media Client November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 281 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System 3 Click Remove and Yes to confirm The K2 Media Client is removed from the tree view Identify
140. aeaaeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 40 Prerequisites for initial CONFIQUIATION ccsecceeeceseeeceseeeeeeseeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeneeeeaaees 40 Defining a new K2 Storage SySteM ccccccccceceeeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeesaesaeaeseeeeeeeeeeess 41 Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 1 00 cccseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 43 Configuring RAID ycceosaes cats ees ok alee a a a 45 Creating a new file system ccccecccccecccaseeeeseeeceeeeeseeeeaaaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessaasaaeeeess 48 Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 2 cccsseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 49 Adding K2 Storage System clients cccccccccecsseeeseeceeeeeeeeseeeeaeeesseeeeeeeesesaaeaeeeeeees 51 Basic operations for level 1 storage cccccccesseeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeesseceeeesueeeeeseueeeessaees 51 Level 1 power off procedure cccccccccccsesseeceeeeeeseececeeceasaeeeeeesasaeeeeeessaesseeeeess 51 Level 1 poweron DLOCeCOU Cs acesi als cet aude ee sy eal eas 52 USINO ETP Or Tile WANS OM sissece artes aceccesanaeccncens E E 52 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Level 2 system description sitatal 052 2 epes deate ale eco ceeise tec es aes ee tea edd 54 Prepating level 2 GeviCeS ssaa e ee ee eae ee ee Et 55 Setting up the Control POINT PC ee ea a e i 55 Setting up the level 2 GigE Switch cc ccceceeeeecececeeeeessseaeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeess 56 Setting UP the K2 Media Server erare a e a a 61 Setting up the L2 RAID Ch
141. age device If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Server Configuration HS File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 p i x M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure Launch Storage Utility the storage system and file system M Shared file system client configuration SS ES File system server 1 10 16 40 145 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Launch Storage Manager Storage Utility opens 3 Continue with the next procedure Configuring RAID to use Storage Utility to configure the storage and file system Leave the Configure K2 Server wizard open while you are using Storage Utility When you are done with Storage Utility you continue with the wizard as explained in Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 2 on page 49 Configuring RAID Use Storage Utility to complete the configuration of the L1 RAID chassis as explained in the following topics e Binding disk modules November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 45 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Refer to Prereq
142. all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Subnet Bandwidth Subscribed O0cOdd012124 192 168 100 10 255 255 255 0 OMBsec O0c0dd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMBsec Modify View Target Drives Check Grass Valley Disk Adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GV Fibre Channel adapter iSCSI adapter Wea For level 3 redundant select Backup Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter To verify drives click Check then View Target Drives Click Next K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring media server 2A On this page Do this Database Server Database Server Configuration Yoda FSM3 November 23 2005 Configuration M Clear media database ff Click this button to delete all information stored in the media Erase media database HE database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized the file system M Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version E 1 This database server Redundant database server Check the media database version lt Back Next gt C
143. all three partitions and then click Next The Restored Partition Sizing page opens 10 Select No don t want to resize source partitions and then click Next The Restored Hard Disk Drive Location page opens 11 Select Disk 1 and then click Next The Non Empty Destination Hard Disk Drive page opens 12 Select Yes delete all partitions and then click Next The Next Selection page opens 13 Select No I do not and then click Next The ready to proceed page opens 14 Verify that you are restoring partitions Click Proceed The Commit Pending Operations page opens and displays progress 15 Insert CDs as prompted If a red X error message is displayed you can safely click OK and continue to insert CDs as prompted 16 When a The image was successfully restored message appears click OK 17 Exit the Acronis True Image program The K2 Media Server restarts automatically 18 Remove the Recovery CD while the K2 Media Server is shutting down November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 253 Chapter 9 Managing K2 software 254 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 1 0 FTP on the K2 Storage System Topics in this chapter include the following e About networks and FTP e About the K2 FTP interface About networks and FTP You must have a dedicated network for FTP streaming transfers in and out of the K2 Storage System This network is res
144. alley Disk Adapter iSCSI adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GV cone _ For level 3 redundant select Backup Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter Click Next Completing the Configuration Wizard Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Do not proceed until restart processes are finished If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes If you got a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message on the File System Server Configuration page after the K2 Media Server restarts do the following 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view under the K2 Media Server select the File System Server node 10 16 40 36 aa Software a Network Pap File System Server 28 Media Database Se The File System Server Configuration page appears 2 Click Check and verify that the V drive is shared This is required for NAS server functionality Your configurations for the level 3R K2 Storage System are complete Adding K2 Storage System clients You can add now clients such as K2 Media Clients or NewsEdits to the K2 Storage System and configure them using the K2 System Configuration application e For NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference G
145. alling the Level 2 Storage System unrestricted e If you decide to use the default SNMP community public for NetCentral monitoring which already has RW permissions set as required by NetCentral proceed to the next step 16 Enter the SNMP community and IP address of the NetCentral server PC For example if the IP address is 192 168 40 11 and the community is public you type the following snmp server host public 192 168 40 11 17 Enable Authentication traps by typing the following snmp server enable traps authentication This allows NetCentral to test the switch to verify that it can send its SNMP trap messages to NetCentral 18 Type menu to get to menu mode 19 If you need trunks to gang switches together using 1 Gig connections do the following Note This is not required if you use the 10 Gig ISL connections Select Switch Configuration o 9 Choose selection 2 Port Trunk Settings Press the right arrow key to choose Edit then press Enter Q O Down arrow until at the bottom of the list of ports Right arrow over to the Group column on Use the Space bar and set the bottom port to Trk1 Set the next port up also to Trk1 gt ga Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 9 Choose Reboot Switch to restart the switch 10 You can n
146. allows you to appropriate row and clicking the Modify button configure the FTP it RNR MAC Address IPAddress Subnet Streaming network Ethernet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Server Configuration HS File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure Launch Storage Utility the storage system and file system am Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 File system server 2 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Do not yet click Next Do not yet enter anything in the File System Server 2 box Click Launch Storage Manager Storage Utility opens 3 Continue with the next procedure Configuring RAID to use Storage
147. ancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next 212 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring media server 2A On this page Do this Network Configuration HE Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 A x This page displays the m Network Configuration control network Ethernet The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device ou can modify the ee IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the port and allows you to appropriate row and clicking the Modify button configure the FTP y Port MAC Address IP Address Subnet Streaming network Ethernet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter
148. ancel You do not need to enter or configure anything on this page Click Next Completing the Configuration Wizard Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Do not proceed until restart processes are finished If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes If you got a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message on the File System Server Configuration page after the K2 Media Server restarts do the following 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view under the K2 Media Server select the File System Server node q 10 16 40 36 kal Software 23 Network PE File System Server 23 Media Database Se The File System Server Configuration page appears 2 Click Check and verify that the V drive is shared This is required for NAS server functionality Configuring media server 2A For level 3 redundant after you have configured the first server server 1 A and its redundant partner media server server 1B you next configure the other A server server 2A 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the media server you are configuring as server 2A 2 Click the Configure button The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the server for a level 3R K2 Storage System as described in the following table Some screens require no input from you as they are based on the config
149. and provides instructions for configuring and operating the product e K2 Media Client Service Manual Contains information on servicing and maintenance On line Help Systems K2 Media Client Help You can access the on line help through the AppCenter user interface as follows e In the menu bar select Help then choose AppCenter Help Topics from the drop down menu NetCentral Help From the NetCentral interface access on line help as follows e For general help with NetCentral manager select Help NetCentral Help Topics e For help specific to monitoring K2 Storage System system devices select Help Device Providers and then select the monitored device Thomson Grass Valley Web Site This public Web site contains all the latest manuals and documentation and additional support information Use the following URL http www thomsongrassvalley com November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 17 Finding Information Using the Dell Server documentation This manual contains all of the information you need to install the K2 Storage System however a full set of Dell server documentation has been provided on the Dell Product Documentation CD ROM The Dell server documentation applies to the K2 Media Server Refer to the documents on this CD ROM only as required by procedures in this manual Information referenced on the Dell Product Documentation CD ROM includes but is not limited to e Unpacking and rack
150. and repeat these steps for other unbound disks If specified by your system design you can bind some disks as Hot Spares as explained in Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 When you are done if you did not bind any extra Hot Spares you should have the following results For level two storage you should have three RAID 3 LUNs of five disks each on a RAID storage device If you have the optional Expansion chassis you would have an additional three RAID 3 LUNs of five disks each NOTE L2 RAID controllers can take several hours to bind a LUN Make sure you initiate multiple simultaneous binding processes to reduce the overall time g Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window NOTE Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding 3 Restart the K2 Media Server 4 Continue with the next procedure Creating a new file system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 81 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Creating a new file system 1 In Storage Utility click Tools Make New File System The Setting dialog box opens or Settings l Please enter the number of RTOs M Windows Security OF Cancel 2 For the Real Time Input Output RTIO rate enter the value specified by your system design If you do not know this value contact your Grass Valley representative 3 If the K2 Storage System is to be accessed by only K2 Media Clients you can leave Windo
151. anti virus package executing on the PC can be scheduled to scan the system drives of multiple K2 Systems The following strategies are recommended for virus scanning Run the scanning software on a dedicated PC that connects to the K2 system via a network mount Do not run scanning software locally on the K2 Media Client or K2 Media Server Connect to the K2 computer via 100BaseT network This constrains the bandwidth and system resources consumed so as to not interfere with media operations Do not connect and scan via Gigabit Ethernet Grass Valley does not support the running of anti virus programs on a K2 computer itself at the same time the system is being used to record or play video to air With these recommended strategies you should be able to scan K2 computers without interrupting media access In addition the following protection policies are recommended November 23 2005 Where possible K2 systems should be run in a closed and protected environment without network access to the corporate IS environment or the outside world If the K2 system must operate in a larger network Grass Valley recommends that access be through a gateway or firewall to provide anti virus protection The firewall should allow incoming HTTP TCP ports 80 and 280 connections for client and configuration connections to the K2 system inside the private network Additionally ports should allow incoming packets so requests to the Proxy NAS can be pro
152. anual 157 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System 158 A Controller Network Settings Mel Network Configuration IF Address EE 168 100 5I Subnet Address 255 255 254 U SNMF Configuration 0 0 0 Trap Address 1 10 16 AHA 4 0 oOo 0 OD 0 0 0 OF Cancel Enter the control network IP address and other network settings You want SNMP trap messages go to the NetCentral server PC so for SNMP Configuration enter the IP address of the NetCentral server PC You can also enter IP addresses for other SNMP managers to which you want to send SNMP trap messages Click OK and OK to save settings and close For a level 3 RAID chassis with two controllers you must also configure network settings on the other controller You can do this when you configure the K2 media server connected to the other controller In Storage Utility click View Refresh Continue with the next procedure Binding disk modules Binding disk modules Use the following procedure to bind disk modules as required for the level 3 storage system NOTE Binding destroys all user data on the disks 1 In the Storage Utility main window identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by K2 Storage System Instruction Manual their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view In the following illustration disk numbers are represented by XX Refer to Identifying disks on page 290 for an
153. appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed O0cOdd012124 192 168 100 10 255 255 255 0 OMB sec O0cOdd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMBsec Modify View Target Drives Check Grass Valley Disk Adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GV Fibre Channel adapter iSCSI adapter For level 3 redundant select Primary Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter Click Check The Validation Report opens Am validation Report x y iSCSI adapter was detected v Fibre Channel adapter was detected x AILSCSI ports have been configured Confirm that the iSCSI configuration is successful Close the Validation Report and then click Next Database Server Configuration S Database Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Clear media database Click this button to delete all information stored in the media is database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized the file system Erase media database Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version fe 0 This Database Server fi 0 16 40 145 Redundant Database Server fi 0 16 40 146 Check the media database version lt Back Next gt Cancel Enter the name or I
154. are displayed And related system device or subsystem according to operations available information and in the tree view configuration controls appear File K2Systim Device Help Ta New K2 Sys i Retrieve Configuration QASAN3 FSM1 G Software QASAN3 C Network 3 File System Server Summary C iSCSI Bridge a Media Database Server ab QASAN3 FSM2 Description Level 2 Redundant K2 G Software C Network C3 File System Server Number of servers 2 C iSCSI Bridge Media Database Server Number of Ethernet switches 2 PrimaryGES witch RedundantGE Switch MX PROTO B20 Number of FC switches 0 G Software C Network Number of clients 2 3 Media Database Client 3 File System Client C iSCSI Client ral K2 Media Client2 236 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual If you have one or more K2 Storage Systems currently configured the K2 System Configuration application displays the systems in the tree view If you have not yet configured a K2 Storage System the K2 System Configuration application opens with the tree view blank Refer to the installation chapters earlier in this manual to add and configure a new K2 Storage System You can expand and select nodes in the tree view to view K2 Storage Systems individual devices and configuration settings When you do so the K2 System Configuration application displays information as found in a configuration file rather than contin
155. at identifies the controller on the Fibre Channel fabric To set the Fibre Channel address ID on the L2 RAID refer to the following diagram Set a unique Fibre Channel address on both L2 RAID controllers Address ID 2 Connect the L2 RAID chassis Connect Fibre Channel cabling Maximum of 1 Expansion Chassis L2RAID p i Expansion S 29 X See Chassis Eu if installed se ee ai To media To media Chassis POOG Connect Ethernet and diagnostic cabling as shown in the following diagram Be aware of the following cabling requirements of the level 2 storage devices November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 99 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System e Each L2 RAID chassis has a single connection to the Ethernet fabric through its LAN card e Each Expansi
156. ated for Electromagnetic Compatibility under the EN 55103 1 2 standards for Emissions and Immunity and meets the requirements for E4 environment This product complies with Class A E4 environment In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FCC Emission Limits This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesirable operation Laser Compliance Laser Safety Requirements Laser Safety The device used in this product is a Class 1 certified laser product Operating this product outside specifications or altering its original design may result in hazardous radiation exposure and may be considered an act of modifying or new manufacturing of a laser product under U S regulations contained in 21CFR Chapter 1 subchapter J or CENELEC regulations in HD 482 S1 People performing such an act are required by law to recertify and reidentify this product in accordance with provisions of 21CFR subchapter J for distribution within the U S A and in accordance with CENELEC HD 482 S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825 standard Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH The laser
157. ation to assign it to the same available bandwidth on the same iSCSI target as previously Modifying K2 Media Client media network settings To modify the media network IP address of a K2 Media Client use the following procedure Refer to procedures elsewhere in this document for the details of individual steps 1 Stop media access on the K2 Media Client 2 In the K2 System Configuration application open the Network configuration page for the K2 Media Client 3 Modify the IP address 4 Edit hosts files or other name resolution mechanisms for all the devices of the K2 Storage System 5 Restart the K2 Media Client 282 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Modifying load balancing Modifying load balancing Modifying the iSCSI load balancing on an existing K2 Storage System is not supported as a customer procedure This is because the load balancing 1s a fundamental baseline for the design of the system To change the load balancing specifications requires custom design and implementation services that should only be attempted by qualified Grass Valley personnel Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for a general discussion of load balancing Using Storage Utility When doing configuration or service work on the media file system the media database or the RAID storage devices of an existing K2 Storage System the primary tool is the Storage Utility Refer to Storage Utility on page 237 for
158. automatically selects a hot spare drive to use in place of the failed drive This prevents the system from operating in a degraded state If the drives you want to designate as hot spares are bound as part of a LUN you must unbind the drives first then bind them as hot spares To function as a Hot Spare the drive must be at least as fast and have at least as much capacity as the failed drive it replaces The requirements for this procedure are as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be shut down To bind drives as hot spare drives do the following 1 In Storage Utility right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu Peer controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a pair The Binding LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list 2 Select Hot Spare using the LUN TYPE drop down box 3 In the Available Disks box select the disk s to be used as hot spares then click the add arrow button to add them to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then clic
159. ay lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before powering up clients When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes 5 Power on the remaining K2 Media Server This is the FTP server Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes 6 Power on K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients Using FTP for file transfer Refer to Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 169 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System 170 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Use this chapter to install the K2 Level 3 Redundant L3R storage system This chapter includes the following topics e Level 3R system description on page 172 e Preparing level 3R devices on page 173 e Networking for level 3R on page 188 e Configuring the level 3R storage system on page 192 e Adding K2 Storage System clients on page 217 e Basic operations for level 3R storage on page 218 Work through these topics sequentially to install the storage system November 2
160. binding LUNs will delete all the astng media Available LUNs Selected LUNs LUNS OK Cancel 3 Verify that the LUN or LUNs you intend to unbind is in the Selected LUNs box If not select LUNs and click the arrow buttons until the LUNs you intend to bind are in the Selected LUNs box and the LUNs you do not intend to unbind are in the Available LUNs box NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive LED to flash 4 Click OK to close the Unbind LUNs dialog box and begin the unbinding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the unbinding process 5 When progress reports 100 complete the LUN is unbound 6 Restart the K2 Media Server Binding LUNs Binding disk modules formats them into a logical units called LUNs The disks that make up a LUN are accessed as a contiguous disk space Disk modules must be bound before they can be part of the video storage file system You can use the Storage Utility to bind disk modules as RAID 1 RAID 3 RAID 5 or as hot spare LUNs depending on the storage needs of your system For simplicity the Storage Utility only allows binding the first available at the top of the Available Disks list contiguous disk modules into LUNs After binding disk modules become slot specific and cannot be moved to other disk module slots The requirements for t
161. c In the Mode drop down list select Tagged then click Apply This allows the trunks to carry traffic from either VLAN d Click the VLAN Configuration tab 10 On the VLAN Configuration page verify that for both VLANS the trunks are displayed in the Tagged Ports column 11 Repeat this procedure for the other Ethernet switch 12 Close the switch configuration application Setting up the K2 media server Do the following to prepare each K2 media server e Install the server in its permanent location Refer to the rack mount instructions that you received with the server s product bundle e Provide power to the servers e Connect cables as follows November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 97 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System ISCO interface cards GigE media Fibre Channel Om o OGnTo o o o EJ EA co amp eS Ly DO pot Keyboard M Power Serial port VGA monitor FTP ae USB ause Connect the two iSCSI interface adapters to media ports on the GigE switch Connect the motherboard GigE port 1 and GigE port 2 to control ports on the GigE switch Connect one of the Fibre Channel ports to the RAID storage device Make a direct connection between the serial ports of the two servers e Assign a control network IP address to GigE port 1 Use standard Windows procedures Refer to Networking tips on page 32
162. ca na om ogo The recommended K2 Ethernet switch is a HP ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G This switch has been tested and qualified for the K2 Storage System The switch is a store and forward device offering low latency for high speed networking In addition the switch offers full network management capabilities You can also use a Cisco Catalyst 3750 Gigabit Ethernet switch as supplied by Grass Valley if required by your site Refer to the manuals that you receive with the switch for more information K2 Ethernet switch specifications The K2 Ethernet switch HP ProCurve 3400cl 24G has specifications as follows Characteristic Specification Ports 24 auto sensing 10 100 1000Base TX RJ 45 ports 4 dual personality ports either auto sensing 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 or mini GBIC One slot is provided in the back of the device to support a two port 10 Gigabit per second Ethernet 10 GbE module to provide box connectivity to other switch boxes to a 10 Gigabit per second concentrator or to any Ethernet compatible uplink Dimensions 44 3 cm 17 42 in W x 36 7 cm 14 4 in D x 4 4 cm 1 7 in H Weight 4 62 kg 10 20 Ibs Input voltage 100 127 200 240 volts 50 60 Hz Temperature Operating 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Non operating 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158 F Relative humidity Operating 15 to 95 at 40 C 104 F non condensing Non operating 15 to 90 at 65 C 149 F
163. cel If the RAID chassis has two controllers click Launch Storage Utility In the Storage Utility tree view right click the icon for the RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties Enter network and SNMP settings then close dialog boxes and Storage Utility to return to this page Refer to Configuring L3R RAID network and SNMP settings on page 198 for similar Storage Utility procedures Click Check Confirm a default cfg file copied message When the wizard reports that the configuration check is successful click Next and Yes to confirm copying default cfg to the other server If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions related to this message later in the procedure iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapters and the page validates that the Fibre Channel adapter is in place and that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HE iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 DRdge TeGuUNdaNGY A OSS IOS SSSSSSSSESY Backup Primary Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration Hg The following list identifies
164. chassis if present prior to or simultaneous with the power on for the main Fibre Channel chassis NOTE Always power on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to or simultaneously with the RAID Controller chassis Verify that start up indicators show normal start up processes as follows e Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady approximately 4 minutes e The controller READY LED is ON e The controller DIR LED flashes green e The front Power LED is ON e The front Service LED is OFF Refer to the L2 RAID Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or status LED behavior Power on the K2 Media Server Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes Power on K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients Using FTP for file transfer Refer to Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 87 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System 88 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Use this chapter to install the K2 Level 2 Redundant L2R storage system This chapter includes the following topics e Level 2R system description on page 90 e Prepari
165. ck Check The Validation Report opens validation Report iSCSI adapter was detected x Fibre Channel adapter was detected x AlliSCSI ports have been configured Confirm that the iSCSI configuration is successful Close the Validation Report and then click Next Database Server Configuration HE Database Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Clear media database Click this button to delete all information stored in the media database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized Erase media database Es the file system Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version fe 0 Check the media database version lt Back Next gt Cancel You do not need to enter or configure anything on this page Click Next Completing the Configuration Wizard Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Wait until all startup processes have completed before continuing If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 85 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Your configurations for the level 2 K2 Storage System are complete Adding K2 Storage System clients You can add now clients such as K2 Media Clients or NewsEdits to the K2 Storage System and configure them using the K2 System Configuration application e For NewsEdits refer to t
166. ct Support ccceeeeceeecceeeeeseaeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaas 19 Chapter 1 Product Description Overview DESCHPUON aiaee ct cate deeds seeded ed eee 22 een gl ors 10 oi eee Conner ee Rene ee a re tea ee eee ecm mn E er Renee ee 23 Chapter 2 Installing the Level 1 Storage System Level I SYVSICMGeOSCHOON Sxcureteuccebe os a are 26 Preparing level WOeviceSii cs ecco i a ele ae ea el oe ihe 26 Setting up the Control point PC ccc cceccseseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseaeeaeeeees 27 Setting up the level 1 GigE Switch ec eeeeceeeceeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeees 27 Setting up the L1 RAID Cha SSiS cccccccsssssssseecceeeeceeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessaaeeaeeeess 33 Preparing K2 Storage System clients cccccccececcceeseeeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 35 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral ccccccececcssesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeess 35 Networking for level 1 ccccsssseccccessceeccesececeeeseeesesececseuseeeeseuseeeesseeeesssageesessages 36 Networking reQuireMent c cccsccccccssseecceeesceecceeeeecseueeeeseaeeeesseeseeesssaneeesesages 36 Networking TOS ei aor a a r E E ean iseGanen dss a S eaS 37 SE MMO SUP MOST TA OS oats i eeepc iat ce ete ean tee ca eee cel tet ee ceenceedoinee 38 Testing the COMIPOIMEIWOIK sarreria aster Sereda eed ae eh oaks 39 Configuring the level 1 Storage system ccccceeceeeeecaeeseeeseeeeeeees
167. cted Power on November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 151 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Defining a new K2 Storage System Define a level 3 K2 Storage System as follows 1 On the control point PC open the K2 System Configuration application A login dialog box opens Please enter the administrative account name and password that will be used to configure the K2 sustems User name Password Ok Cancel 2 Log in to the K2 System Configuration application with the Windows adminstrator account By default this as follows e Username administrator e Password admink2 Refer to Setting up application security on page 262 for more information about administrator accounts and logging in to applications Jh K2 System Configuration File K2System Device Help Ja E New K2 System Retrieve Configuration 3 Click New K2 System The New K2 System wizard opens 152 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Defining a new K2 Storage System Follow the on screen text to define your level 3 K2 Storage System as described in the following table On this page Do this Page 1 HE New K2 System Page 1 E s xi Welcome to the New K2 System Wizard This wizard defines the type and number of devices on your K2 system Name Enter a name for the K2 system System configuration C Level Select the type of K2 system
168. dancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge C Primary C Backup This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapter and the page validates that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI Modify View Target Drives Check tar gets 3 Fibre Channel adapter Grass Valley Disk Adapter iSCSI adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GV cael iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address Haj and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed 00cUdd01 2124 192 168 100 10 209 205 205 0 OMB sec cccoccoccoccocecococcscoocccecocecccosooceeeoosoososoeeecocoosccccecoosocoocecceosocsecocoeceeooossecooeeeooooscccccocesoocccsecccoocecccoccecceeooeoesoeceeeooooeeccceoecesecocccccooceosococcecoceosssesooeesoooosesccceosoeososececcocossssscececosossso 00cO0dd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMB sec For level 3 select Primary Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter To verify drives click Check then View Target Drives Click Next Completing the Click Finish Th
169. derway there will be period of time in which media loss will occur In the following procedures K2server1 and K2server2 represent your redundant K2 Media Servers The procedure begins with K2server1 acting as the primary K2 Media Server 1 Verify primary backup roles make sure that replication is complete and make sure K2server2 the backup is qualified and ready to become primary 2 From the K2 System Configuration application open Server Control Panel 3 In Server Control Panel for K2server1 click Stop This starts the failover process K2serverl shuts down K2server2 detects via the absence of the heartbeat signal 272 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Triggering an intentional failover on the serial cable that K2serverl is gone so K2server2 takes over as primary Allow the failover process to complete until K2server2 is operating correctly in its new role as the primary K2 Media Server for the K2 Storage System Verify K2server2 as primary as explained in Identifying current primary backup K2 Media Servers on page 270 Start up K2server1 It is now out of service Failover Monitor service is off If you need to do service work on K2serverl you can do it now After your work is complete proceed with the next step In Server Control Panel for K2server1 click Start This starts Failover Monitor service which notifies K2server2 via a heartbeat signal on the serial cable
170. dialog box opens A Controller Hetwork Settings Network Configuration IP Address EE 168 100 5I Subnet Address Gateway Address SNMF Configuration Trap Address 1 Trap Address 2 Trap Address 3 OF Cancel 3 Enter network settings 4 For each SNMP manager to which you want to send SNMP trap messages enter the IP address of the PC hosting the manager For monitoring with NetCentral enter the IP address of the NetCentral server PC 5 Click OK to save settings and close 6 If you are working on a Level 3 RAID chassis with two RAID controllers repeat this procedure except in the K2 System Configuration select the K2 Media Server connected to the other RAID controller 7 Restart the RAID chassis to put SNMP configuration changes into effect 300 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Working with Ethernet switches Working with Ethernet switches Use the procedures in this section when doing configuration or service work on a Gigabit Ethernet switch that is part of an existing K2 Storage System In the K2 Configuration Application features for working on a Ethernet switch are as follows Select the To make these Ethernet switch features available Hew K2 System tetneve Configuration F JA GASAN2 Eh 10 17 40 67 E 10 16 40 66 Ethernet Switch Configuration Hostname or IF address Configure Switch From the K2 System Conf
171. disk module or by checking disk status in Storage Utility 6 Wait approximately 1 minute for the disk to initialize The disk ready LED is flashing 7 To check rebuild status do one of the following e Select the replacement disk icon in Storage Utility then view the disk status in the right hand pane You may need to refresh the Storage Utility display On completion the drive status changes from Rebuilding to Online e Open the Progress dialog box by clicking View Progress Report Replacing a controller If the RAID chassis has a single controller non redundant you must take the K2 Storage System offline before replacing a failed controller Refer to procedures in the Instruction Manual for your level of RAID storage chassis The remainder of this procedure does not apply to non redundant systems If the RAID chassis has redundant controllers and is properly cabled and configured for a redundant K2 Storage System you can replace a failed controller while media access is underway as described in this procedure When a controller detects a fault November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 297 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System on its redundant partner controller the good controller disables the faulty controller automatically In most cases an error message informs you of the fault and when you check the controller s status in Storage Utility it reports as disabled However you
172. disks for media storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu If the RAID chassis has two controllers both controllers are November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 201 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System represented by the single Controller node The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Bind LUN 5 x LUN Type RAID 5 M Full Bind Aveallable Disks Flash the drive lights Identity NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it b In the LUN TYPE drop down box select RAID 5 c In the Available Disks box select five contiguous disks at the top of the list TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks d Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process 202 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID A Progress Report Me Curent Status Busy Commands List StartTime Binding LUN on
173. dress which indicates that on the Control Point PC the host table entry is correct 5 Ping the other K2 Storage System devices to which you have assigned control network IP addresses 6 Go to each Windows device in the K2 Storage System and repeat this procedure This verifies that network communication is correct to and from all devices November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 191 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Configuring the level 3R storage system Use the topics in this section to do the initial configuration of the level 3R storage system e Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 192 e Defining anew K2 Storage System on page 193 e Configuring the media server 1A Part 1 on page 195 e Configuring RAID on page 197 e Creating a new file system on page 204 e Configuring the media server 1A Part 2 on page 205 Prerequisites for initial configuration Before beginning your initial configuration make sure the devices of the K2 Storage System meet the following prerequisites Refer to sections earlier in this manual for detailed information Also refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices Devices Prerequisite for level 3R configuration Control point PC Ethernet cable connected Control Point software installed Control network IP address assigned Network communication over the control network with all other K2 devices
174. dure and follow the instructions related to this message later in the procedure iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration HS iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 E x This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapter and the page validates that the media LUNs are visible as iS CSI Modify View Target Drives Check tar gets Fibre Channel adapter Grass Valley Disk Adapter iSCSI adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GY iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address Haj and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed 00cOdd01 2124 192 169 100 10 255 255 255 0 OMB sec eceecceccecceccecceccceccececceeecessececececcesescecececososecceeeceecsoecceccceccesescecoceescceseececececoseeececceceseocseeceeceeecescececcescoseseececececseseseccececosseeceecceeesssecoceccescsessseceeecssoeeeseccecesscsesececcecsssssecececsesssee Select the iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply To verify drives click Check then View Target Drives Click Next 50 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23
175. e If you are not sure wait 10 minutes Put the backup K2 Media Server in service From the K2 System Configuration application open Server Control Panel and for the backup server click Start Wait until database replication is complete and indicators display green for both the file system and the database Verify that primary and backup server are in their correct roles Power on K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients Using FTP for file transfer Refer to Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System 130 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Use this chapter to install the K2 Level 3 L3 storage system This chapter includes the following topics e Level 3 system description on page 132 e Preparing level 3 devices on page 133 e Networking for level 3 on page 147 e Configuring the level 3 storage system on page 151 e Adding K2 Storage System clients on page 167 e Basic operations for level 3 storage on page 167 Work through these topics sequentially to install the storage system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 131 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Level 3 system description Multiple iSCSI clients JOUOD epay JOUOD epon I Qz 38 o oD Control T ES aaan Gigabit Ethernet switch Control point
176. e Modify the IP address and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed O0cOdd01 2124 192 168 100 10 255 255 255 0 OMB sec O0cOdd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMB sec Modify View Target Drives Check Fibre Channel adapter Grass Valley Disk Adapter iSCSI adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter G a For level 2 redundant select Backup Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter To verify drives click Check then View Target Drives Click Next K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Adding K2 Storage System clients On this page Do this Database Server Database Server Configuration Yoda FSM3 Configuration M Clear media database ff Click this button to delete all information stored in the media Erase media database HE database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized the file system M Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version E 1 This database server Redundant database server Check the media database version lt Back Next gt Cancel You do not need to enter or configure anything on this
177. e media iSCSI network Each team shares a single IP address This provides redundancy Do not attempt to un team these ports Use the following procedures as necessary to implement your networking strategies NOTE Media network iSCSI IP addresses and Streaming network IP addresses are assigned using the K2 System Configuration application Networking tips Establish a consistent convention for machine names and IP addresses It is recommended that you embed a root name or other unique identifier for this particular K2 Storage System in the computer name Also a common convention for IP addresses is to use a numerical pattern or sequence in the IP addresses to indicate device types and or ports as in the following example NOTE This example assumes a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Example of Level 2R names and IP addresses Computer Device type Streaming network Control network Media network Comments name addresses addresses addresses root_server_1 Media server 192 168 101 11 192 168 100 11 192 168 99 11 These two 192 168 99 12 root_server_2 Media server 192 168 101 21 192 168 100 21 192 168 99 21 192 168 99 22 servers are a redundant pair root_raid_1 RAID 192 168 100 51 Both controllers share the same IP address root_gige_1 GigE switch 192 168 100 61 root_gige_2 GigE switch 192 168 100 62 root_cppc_l Control point 192 16
178. e Channel adapter iSCSI adapter Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter Click Check The Validation Report opens Am validation Report y iSCSI adapter was detected x Fibre Channel adapter was detected x AlliSCSI ports have been configured Confirm that the iSCSI configuration is successful Close the Validation Report and then click Next Database Server Configuration HE Database Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Clear media database Click this button to delete all information stored in the media database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized E3 the file system Erase media database Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version fa 0 Check the media database version lt Back Next gt Cancel You do not need to enter or configure anything on this page Click Next Completing the Configuration Wizard Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Wait until all startup processes have completed before continuing If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring media server 2 Configuring media server 2 For level 3 after you have confi
179. e System 220 Device Verification instructions Power on RAID storage devices Power on expansion chassis if present prior to or simultaneous with the power on for the main Fibre Channel chassis NOTE Always power on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to or simultaneously with the RAID Controller chassis Verify that start up indicators show normal start up processes as follows e DIR and SVP LEDs on the RAID controllers are blinking green e Disk Link LED is steady ON green e FLT and BAT LEDs are OFF e The front Power LED is ON Service LED is OFF after about 5 minutes Refer to the L3R RAID Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or status LED behavior Power on the primary K2 Media Server This is the server that Server Control Panel reported was primary when you last powered down Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes the K2 Storage System NOTE Bringing up primary redundant servers in the wrong order can render the system inoperable and result in loss of media Put the primay K2 Media From the K2 System Configuration application open Server Server in service Control Panel and for the primary server click Start Wait until indicators di
180. e System The Setting dialog box opens or Settings l Please enter the number of RTOs M Windows Security OF Cancel 2 For the Real Time Input Output RTIO rate enter the value specified by your system design If you do not know this value contact your Grass Valley representative 3 If the K2 Storage System is to be accessed by only K2 Media Clients you can leave Windows Security unchecked If accessed by NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions 4 Click OK The Set Stripe Group dialog box opens A Set Stipe Group O Available Drives K2Disk 512 69799936 K2Disk1 512 69799936 K2Disk2 512 559331328 K2Disk3 512 559331328 K2Disk4 512 559331328 K2Disk5 512 559331328 K2DiskE 512 559331328 Metastripe K2Disk JournalStripe JK2Disk1 OF Cancel 5 If you have RAID 1 LUNS assign a RAID 1 LUN as a metadata stripe and another 204 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server IA Part 2 RAID 1 LUN as a journal stripe You can distinguish RAID 1 LUNs from media LUNs by the value in the Number of Sectors column 6 Click OK The Configuration File dialog box opens or Configuration File E K l0 x select Accept to acceptthe configuration file Cancel to abort making new file system Edit to editthe configuration file Windows ecurity FileLocks lnodeE pandMin lnodeE pandinc lnodeE pa
181. e System Server is backup This Database Server is primary D This Database Server is backup Database Replication ts running Stark Stop Stark Stop K eerverl is the primary FSM K2servere is the backup FSM If your K2 Storage System has redundant servers both panels two servers appear 3 Identify the primary K2 Media Server and the backup K2 Media Server 4 Also determine if database replication is currently taking place You must not attempt to trigger an intentional failover event or otherwise take servers out of service until database replication 1s complete If the K2 Storage System does not have redundant servers only one server the left half of the Server Control Panel is displayed and there is no indicator for database replication Identifying primary backup from the local K2 Media Server 1 If you have not already done so connect keyboard monitor and mouse to the K2 Media Server and log on to Windows 2 On the Windows desktop click Start Grass Valley Server Control Panel 3 Log on to Server Control panel with administrator level permissions The Server Control Panel opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 271 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Server Control Panel K 2serverl Local K2seryver This Failover Monitor i running g This Failover Monitor i running This File System Server is primary This File Syst
182. e a disk image of the entire system drive which includes the C D and E partitions and store the image file on a set of CDs 1 Make sure that media access is stopped and that the K2 Media Server on which you are working is out of service 2 If you have not already done so connect keyboard monitor and mouse to the K2 Media Server November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 249 Chapter 9 Managing K2 software 3 Insert the Recovery CD and restart the machine The machine boots from the disc The Acronis True Image program loads 4 In the Acronis True Image main window double click Create Image The Create Image Wizard opens 5 On the Welcome page click Next The Selecting Partitions to Image page opens 6 Select Disk 1 to select the System C the Database D and the Backup E partitions and then click Next The Image Archive Creation page opens 7 In the tree view select CD RW Drive F and then enter the name of the image file you are creating Create the file name using the K2 Media Server hostname and the date Name the file with the tib extension For example if the hostname is K2Server1 in the File name field you would have FP K2Serverl 20051027 tib Click Next The Compression Level page opens 8 Leave the selection at Normal and click Next The Image Archive Protection page opens 9 You can leave the password fields blank so that no password is required to restore from the i
183. e blinking b The LEDs on the disk or disks display a flashing pattern Verify the location of the disk or disks Get controller logs 1 In the Storage Utility tree view select the controller 2 Click Actions Get Controller Logs 3 A message informs you of the location of the logs 4 Find the log files on the K2 Media Sever at C profile Vlogs Unbind LUN Unbinding reverses the bind process Unbinding might be needed when reconfiguring a storage system Level 2 and Level 3 RAID storage devices allow unbinding LUNs independently For the Level 1 RAID storage chassis you can only unbind one LUN at a time A CAUTION Unbinding destroys all data stored on disk modules The requirements for this procedure are as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be shut down To unbind a LUN do the following 1 In the tree view right click the LUN and select Unbind LUN 2 When warning messages appear destroy all existing media and Are you sure click OK to continue The Unbind LUNs dialog box opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 291 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System A Unbind LUNs le WARNING Un
184. e control point PC and K2 Media Client 49172 HTTP Grass Valley Connection for Storage Utility between control Storage Utility Host point PC and K2 Media Client or K2 Media Server Synchronizing system clocks It is required that the system clocks on the devices of the K2 Storage System be kept synchronized The main purpose for this time synchronization is so that entries in the various logs on the K2 Storage System devices can be correlated The following procedure describes a mechanism by which clocks are synchronized If your facility has other mechanisms by which you synchronize system clocks you can use your own methods as long as it accomplishes the goal of keeping the system clocks synchronized To synchronize system clocks do the following 1 Designate a K2 Media Server as the time server 2 On each K2 Media Client iSCSI client and any additional K2 Media Servers in the Windows Control Panel open Date and Time 3 On the Internet Time tab enter the K2 Media Server that is the time server 264 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Modifying K2 Storage System settings Modifying K2 Storage System settings Use the procedures in this section when changing settings on an existing K2 Storage System These are the settings that define the K2 Storage System Procedures are as follows e Accessing K2 Storage System features on page 265 e Renaming a K2 Storage System on page 265 e Addin
185. e following software is pre installed on K2 products when you receive them from the factory This load of pre installed software is referred to as the golden drive K2 Media Client pre installed software e Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 0 2 e ATI video driver for Radeon 9250 244 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 K2 Media Server pre installed software Windows XP CD Writing Wizard Intel Client Instrumentation Intel Pro Intelligent Installer Intel Pro Software 10 1 Intel Pro WMI Provider 2 0 J2SE Runtime Environment 5 0 Update 4 Microsoft iSCSI Initiator 2 0 MS XML 4 0 NET Framework 1 1 NET Framework 1 1 Hotfix MS SQL Desktop Engine Service Pack 3 Power Console Plus 5 00n Quicktime StorNext 2 5 2b56 Supero Doctor 3 Texas Instruments VCP Install 1 2 11 3 For USB RS422 ports Windows Installer 3 1 K2 Media Server pre installed software November 23 2005 Adobe Reader 7 0 3 ATI Display Driver 8 08 041 11 1a 020816C Dell Dell OpenManage 4 2 0 Dell OpenManage Array Manager Dell OpenManage IT Assistant Easy CD Creater 5 Basic 5 3 4 21 Intel LAN Adapter SNMP Agent 1 00 0000 Intel Pro Network Adapters amp Drivers IT Assistant v6 5 SP3 J2SE RunTime Environment 5 0 Update 4 1 5 0 40 MS J Redistributable Package 1 1 MS SQL 2000 SP3 8 00 760 MS XML 4 0 SP2 Parser amp SDK 4 20 9818 0 OpForce IT Automation Suite v2 1 OSA BMC Management Utility K2 Storage System Instructi
186. e motherboard GigE port and GigE port 2 to control ports on the GigE switch Connect one of the Fibre Channel ports to the RAID storage device e Assign a control network IP address to GigE port 1 Use standard Windows procedures Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Configure SNMP properties so the trap destination points to the NetCentral server PC If you are not using the SNMP community name public configure the community name and set permissions to RW Also make sure that the Authentication trap is enabled November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 139 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Also refer to K2 Media Server description on page 226 Setting up the L3 RAID chassis Do the following to prepare the L3 RAID storage devices e Install the chassis in its permanent location Refer to the L3 RAID Instruction Manual for rack mount instructions e Assign Fibre Channel address ID on page 141 e Connect the L3 RAID chassis on page 141 e Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis on page 142 e Power on the L3 RAID chassis on page 144 In addition you will configure network settings SNMP settings and bind LUNs These tasks are part of the K2 System Configuration application and Storage Utility procedures later in this chapter The process of binding LUNs can take a significant amount of time as much as eight hours so you might want to put pri
187. e system 1 In Storage Utility click Tools Make New File System The Setting dialog box opens A Settings Ma Please enter the number of RTOs M Windows Security OK Cancel 2 For the Real Time Input Output RTIO rate enter the value specified by your system design If you do not know this value contact your Grass Valley representative 3 If the K2 Storage System is to be accessed by only K2 Media Clients you can leave 48 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the LI RAID storage device Part 2 Windows Security unchecked If accessed by NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions 4 Click OK The Configuration File dialog box opens A Configuration File E a loj x select Accept to acceptthe configuration file Cancel to abort making new file system Edit to editthe configuration file Windows ecurity FileLocks lnodeE pandMin lnodeE pandinc lnodeE pandM ay a at Luotas ma ae mae ae Debug Sees e Allocations trategy Accept Cancel Edit The configuration file for the media file system is displayed You can verify media file system parameters by viewing this file Do not edit this file Click Accept A Please wait message box displays progress and a succeeded message confirms the process is complete 5 A message informs you that you must restart the Level 1 RAID storage
188. e view select the K2 Media Server 2 Select Server Control Panel The Server Control Panel opens 3 Identify the K2 Media Server you intend to place in service and consider the following November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 275 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System e On non redundant K2 Storage Systems levels 1 2 and 3 check to see if the Failover Monitor service is already running In most cases it will be since when the K2 Media Server starts up the Failover Monitor service starts automatically If it is not running continue with this procedure e On redundant K2 Storage Systems level 2R and 3R verify that the Failover Monitor service is not running on the server you intend to place in service Also make sure that the media database is healthy on the K2 Media Server currently acting as primary If you know there are problems with the media database on the primary server these problems will likely be populated to the backup K2 Media Server via the media database replication process when you place it in service in which case you should not place the backup server in service 4 For the K2 Media Server that you want to place in service click the Start button This starts the failover service If you are placing a backup K2 Media Server into service the database replication process begins Database replication must complete before the server is qualified to act as the backup server
189. e wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Do not Configuration Wizard proceed until restart processes are finished If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes Your configurations for the level 3 K2 Storage System are complete Adding K2 Storage System clients You can add now clients such as K2 Media Clients or NewsEdits to the K2 Storage System and configure them using the K2 System Configuration application e For NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions e For K2 Media Clients refer to K2 Media Client System Guide for instructions Basic operations for level 3 storage Use the following procedures as you work on your level 3 storage system e Level 3 power off procedure e Level 3 power on procedure e Using FTP for file transfer For other procedures refer to Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System on page 261 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 167 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System Level 3 power off procedure Use the following sequence to power off the level 3 storage system 1 Power off all K2 Media clients or other iSCSI clients 2 Shut down the K2 Media Server that is the media file system and database server 3 Shut down the K2 Media Server that is the FTP server 4 Power off the RAID controller chassis If expansion chassis are connected make sure the power off of the contro
190. ead the disk image from your set of CDs and restore all three partitions b Restart into Windows c Copy your most recent disk image to the E partition d Boot from the Recovery CD e Read the image from the E partition to restore the C partition restore the D partition or restore both partitions Plan a recovery strategy that is appropriate for your facility then refer to the following procedures as necessary to implement your strategy Creating a recovery disk image for storing on E Do the following at the local K2 Media Server to create a disk image of the C partition and the D partition and store the image file on the E partition 1 Make sure that media access is stopped and that the K2 Media Server on which you are working is out of service 2 If you have not already done so connect keyboard monitor and mouse to the K2 Media Server 3 Insert the Recovery CD and restart the machine The machine boots from the disc The Acronis True Image program loads 4 In the Acronis True Image main window double click Create Image 248 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Creating a recovery disk image CD set The Create Image Wizard opens 5 On the Welcome page click Next The Selecting Partitions to Image page opens 6 Select the System C and the Database D partitions and then click Next The Image Archive Creation page opens 7 In the tree view select the Backup E partition and
191. ease notes contain the latest information they are printed out rather than included in the Documentation CD ROM You can find the release notes packaged with the RAID storage chassis Documentation CD ROM Except for the release notes the full set of support documentation including this manual is available on the Documentation CD ROM that you receive with your K2 Storage System You can find the Documentation CD ROM packaged with the RAID storage chassis 16 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Getting more information The Documentation CD ROM includes the following e K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Contains installation configuration and maintenance procedures for shared storage options e RAID Instruction Manuals There is an Instruction Manual for each type of RAID storage device that can be a part of a K2 Storage System These manuals contain procedures for configuring and servicing the device e K2 Media Client System Guide Contains the product specifications and step by step instructions for modifying system settings Includes instructions for adding a K2 Media Client to the K2 Storage System e K2 Media Client Quick Start Guides The Quick Start Guides provides step by step installation instructions for basic installation and operation of the SD only and the HD SD K2 Media Client including recording and playing clips e K2 Media Client User Manual Describes the K2 Media Client
192. echanism by which the K2 configuration information is communicated to NetCentral Whether the control point PC and the NetCentral server PC are the same PC or are different PCs you must still add the control point PC to NetCentral In addition NetCentral automatically changes its view of the K2 Storage System whenever you use the K2 System Configuration application to do one of the following e Remove a K2 Storage System e Rename a K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 67 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System e Add a device to a K2 Storage System e Remove a device from a K2 Storage System Refer to the NetCentral User Guide to set up the NetCentral system After installing a device provider you can find additional documentation about monitoring that type of device on the NetCentral Help menu 68 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Networking for level 2 Networking for level 2 Use the topics in this section to configure the Gigabit Ethernet GigE network for the level 2 storage system e Networking requirements on page 69 e Networking tips on page 70 e Setting up host tables on page 70 e Testing the control network on page 71 Networking requirements Required networking strategies for a K2 Storage System are as follows e Three networks e Media network Exclusively for iSCSI traffic e Streaming network For media trans
193. ed to this message later in the procedure November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 163 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System 164 On this page Do this iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapters and the page validates that the Fibre Channel adapter is in place and that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HBliSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge Primary Backup iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration Hg The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed O0cUdd01 2124 192 168 100 170 255 255 255 0 i Nececsssscecsccsessenensssccssssccensessnssssscscssnssnsnscscecssccsusnnseesessssusueennsssesssesensenanaaasssccecsncanaasessesesercnanansasasssseuanenaaaasnesescsussenaauacessussucsenanonesssucssuseenasasessssesssesaasassesssssscnenensesssssseses O0c0dd01 2154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMB sec Modify View Target Drives Check Grass Valley Disk Adapter QLogic Target Mode QL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GY Fibr
194. edia Server Modifying K2 Media Server control network settings If the K2 Media Server takes the role of media file system and database server modifying its control network settings on an existing K2 Storage System is not supported as a customer procedure This is because the network identity of the K2 276 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Replacing an iSCSI interface adapter TOE card Media Server is embedded throughout the K2 Storage System To reconfigure this network identity you must reconfigure the entire system from the start Contact your Grass Valley representative for assistance Modifying K2 Media Server FTP network settings You can modify the FTP network settings using the K2 System Configuration application without directly affecting the media file system or database However you must be aware of the requirements of your site s FTP file transfer and streaming system design as the FTP network settings will likely need to be changed elsewhere Modifying K2 Media Server media network settings Use this procedure if you must change the IP address assigned to an iSCSI interface board on a K2 media server or on a K2 Level 1 RAID storage device This should not be necessary for a normally operating system and in fact it should be avoided if possible as it requires a complete reconfiguration of all iSCSI clients To change the IP address assigned to an 1SCSI interface board open the K2 System Confi
195. eeeeeeecseeseesssaeeess 86 Level 2 power off PrOCCCUIE ccccccsssseeeececcaseuceeeecceuseeeeeesuuaueeeesseesaaeseeeesaaas 86 Level 2 power on PLFOCECUIE ccccccccssseeeeeeecaeeeececccaauseeeeeeesuuaueeeeesseaaaeeeeeesaaas 86 Using FTP for file transfer css cin cts es cexzsces wdadeacchced saeaeeecosdeheteacecee maancieedatenctmete 87 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Level 2R system description ccceeecccceceeseeccececaesececeeceeeeeeeeeeseaseeeesesseseesessaas 90 Prepanno level 2A CeOViCCS onura enne AEAEE EER 91 Setting Up the Control DOIN PC aamisteane a Sit 91 Setting up the level 2R redundant GigE switches ccceeccceeeceesseeeeeeeeeeees 92 Setting up the K2 media SELVES cc ecceceseseeeecececeeeeeeaeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseessaseaeeeeeeeeeess 97 Setting Up the L2 RAID CHASSIS cana ceteris a ik ioe 98 Preparing K2 Storage System ClENtS ccceeeeccececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessaasaeeeeees 102 Sending K2 configuration to NetCenttal ccccccccccccccceeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeees 103 Networking for level 2R erriei a aa aai 104 Networking requirements ccccccssececccesseeeceeeeceeeceasseeeceueeeessegseeecsueeesesaaeees 104 INCTWOFKINIG TDS eraai pie a e a a e aaa e aaa AERE 105 Setting UP NOSt tAbleS ssi i 105 Testing the Control network cccccccssseececeeseeeccenseeeceaeececeuseeeesauaeeeeseeneensesaaes 106 Configuring the level 2R storage system
196. eessesaaeaeeeseess 285 Cleaning unreferenced files and MOVIES ccccceccceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaeeeeees 285 Making a new Media file SYSTEM cccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeesseaeseeeeessenseeeeess 286 Expanding the media file system by capacity ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 288 Expanding the media file system by DANGWICIN cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 288 WOrkng WILT RAID SION AG Cased terse ss each onsentuesnd a a 289 Checking RAID storage subsystem status ccecccccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeess 289 Checking Controller MiCrOCOE snra a E e 290 lentin ISIS aac aa E e 290 Gel COMmUGiler logs sirpin au 291 Unbind EUN iste Salad cena erate a etd eect e heres a 291 SVC LUNS sae atts aaa A 292 Binding Hot Spare drives ainn A E 294 Loading RAID controller MicrOCOdG ccccccececcseseeeeeeeeaeseeeeeessaaeeeeeeeesaesseeeeess 295 Downloading disk drive firmware cccceeccccceesseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeesaneeeesens 295 Replacing a disk module ccccccssssseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeceaueseeceeseauaseeeeesesaaeeseesseaaaaaes 296 Repic ng a GONMONGE as RTO 297 Configuring Level 2 RAID chassis network and SNMP settingS 00008 298 Configuring Level 3 RAID chassis network and SNMP settingS 00608 299 Working with Ethernet switches ccccccsseceecssseeeceeeeeeceseaseeeeseeeeeeseaeeeessenseeesens 301 NAE s
197. em NOTE Binding destroys all user data on the disks 1 In the Storage Utility main window identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by November 23 2005 their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view In the following illustration disk numbers are represented by XX Refer to Identifying disks on page 290 for an explanation of how disks are actually numbered in Storage Utility K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 115 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System IEI GYG Storage Utility k O x File wiew Actions Tools Help Redundant systems store metadata files and journal files on the RAID chassis which requires a RAID 1 LUN two disks for metadata storage anda RAID 1 LUN two disks for journal storage These LUNs must be bound from the first four disks counting from left to right as you face the front of the RAID chassis in the primary RAID chassis In addition the fifth disk in the primary RAID chassis is bound as a Hot Spare Optionally you can also use some of your other disks in groups of five as Hot Spares Refer to Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 for more information View disk properties and identify the four disks you will use for the RAID 1 LUNs the one Hot Spare disk any other disks that you intend to use for Hot Spares and the remainder of the disks that are available for media storage LUNs Make sure you select disks appropriately as you bind LUNs in the remainder of th
198. em Server it backup E This Database Server is primary This Database Server it backup Database Replication i running Stark Stop Stark Stop keserwerl is the primary FSM kesemez if the backup FSM 4 Determine if the local machine is currently the primary K2 Media Server or the backup K2 Media Server If the K2 Storage System does not have redundant servers only one server the left half of the Server Control Panel is displayed and there is no indicator for database replication Triggering an intentional failover AN WARNING Do not attempt this procedure except under the supervision of qualified Grass Valley personnel The following procedures render the primary K2 Media Server unqualified to carry out its role in managing the K2 Storage System The backup K2 Media Server detects this condition and triggers a failover in which it takes the primary FSM out of service and takes control of the K2 Storage System Therefore before using these procedures verify that the backup K2 Media Server is fully operational and qualified to take control of the K2 Storage System If there has been a recent failover event wait until media database replication processes are complete Also be aware that the failover capabilities of the K2 Storage System are degraded until you place the machine back into service as the backup K2 Media Server You should stop all media access before attempting this procedure If media access is un
199. en press the standby button again to startup The machine boots from the disc The Acronis True Image program loads 4 In the Acronis True Image main window double click Restore Image The Restore Image Wizard opens 5 On the Welcome page click Next The Image Archive Selection page opens 6 In the tree view expand the node for the E partition and select the image file then click Next The Verify Archive Before the Restoring page opens 7 Leave the selection at No don t want to verify and then click Next The Partition or Disk to Restore page opens 8 Select System C and then click Next The Restored Partition Location page opens 9 Select System C and then click Next The Restored Partition Type page opens 10 Leave the selection at Active and then click Next The Restored Partition Size page opens 11 Leave settings at their defaults The size reported in the upper pane is the size detected of the actual C partition This should be the same as that reported in the Partition size field in the middle of the page Free space before and Free space after should both be reported at 0 bytes Click Next The Next Selection page opens 12 Depending on the partitions you are restoring do one of the following e If you are restoring only the C partition select No I do not and then click Next The ready to proceed page opens Skip ahead to step 18 e If you are also restoring the D partition select Yes
200. ent and the disk remains disabled even if the RAID chassis is restarted After replacing the disabled disk module the disk rebuild process starts automatically which also enables the disk module To replace a disk module do the following 1 Open Storage Utility 2 Expand the tree view to display bound disks NOTE Disks modules may not be visible in the tree view if they are part of a newly bound LUN You must restart your RAID chassis and the K2 Media Server to allow the drive modules to be seen in Storage Utility 3 Identify the disk in question Refer to Identifying disks on page 290 4 Select the disk module icon and check its status then proceed as follows e Ifthe disk module reports as disabled proceed to the next step in this procedure e If the disk module reports as online right click the disk module and select Advanced Disable Drive then click OK to continue A message operation succeeded appears The disk is disabled as reported by the disk fault LED NOTE f you accidentally disable the wrong disk module you can enable it again by removing it and then replacing it in the chassis 5 Remove and replace the disk module Refer to procedures in the Instruction Manual for your level of RAID storage chassis On inserting the replacement disk module the RAID controller automatically starts rebuilding the drive You can verify rebuild status by looking at the disk access LED on the front of the
201. erify the device s status Power on the Ethernet Switches This description is for the HP ProCurve switch For the Cisco Catalyst switch refer to the documentation you received with the switch The switch performs its diagnostic self test which takes approximately 50 seconds to complete LED Behavior during the self test is as follows e Initially all the status LED Mode and port LEDs are on for most of the duration of the test e Most of the LEDs go off and then may come on again during phases of the self test For the duration of the self test the Test LED stays on When the self test completes successfully the Power and Fan Status LEDs remain on the Fault and Test LEDs go off and the port LEDs on the front of the switch go into their normal operational mode which is as follows e If the ports are connected to active network devices the LEDs behave according to the LED Mode selected In the default view mode Link the LEDs should be on e If the ports are not connected to active network devices the LEDs will stay off If the LED display is different than what is described above especially if the Fault and Test LEDs stay on for more than 60 seconds or they start blinking the self test has not completed correctly Refer to the manual you received with the switch for troubleshooting information November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 219 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storag
202. erved for FTP streaming traffic as follows e The network must be on a separate subnet e Dedicated GigE cables must be connected to the FTP GigE port on K2 Media Servers that take the role of FTP server e Dedicated FTP ports on K2 Media Servers and other devices must have static IP addresses e For network hostname resolution hostnames mapped to the static FTP IP addresses must have a _he0 suffix appended to the name Also refer to the networking sections in the installation chapters earlier in this manual for network information specific to each K2 Storage System level November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 255 Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System Sample network configuration and hosts file The following diagram illustrates one possible configuration setup with both the control network and the FTP Streaming network shown The media iSCSI network is not shown This diagram includes a K2 Media Client with internal storage a K2 Media Client with external storage as on a K2 Storage System a K2 Media Server as an FTP server on K2 Storage System as well as other Grass Valley systems K2 MediaClient K2 MediaClient 1 internal storage shared storage Note GigE ports 2 and 4 used for media iSCSI network only 10 0 0 60 10 0 0 22 N i NewsEdit1 K2 Media Server 1 mi in ee eS 10 16 42 60 10 16 42 22 SAN_XP1 a 10 16 42 31 E limanan Control Point PC PERE 1016
203. erver 1A depending on the level of the storage system e In the K2 System Configuration application tree view open the node for a K2 Media Server and select the File System Server node to open its property page On the property page click Launch Storage Utility Storage Utility opens In this case the connection to the RAID storage devices is via the selected K2 Media Server November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 283 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System NOTE Do not run Storage Utility on an external storage K2 Media Client For external storage run Storage Utility only via the K2 System Configuration application NOTE Do not run Storage Utility as a stand alone application separate from the K2 System Configuration application To maintain a valid K2 Storage System all configuration must be controlled and tracked through the K2 System Configuration application Overview of Storage Utility f GYG Storage Utility Controllers File View Actions Tools Help in device Fa fon Gao Controller s PM K2AC2 E Dee L Timet SET ER pees eh EME capes Primary IP 192 168 100 517 Bound LUNs Serial Number OOF 928306 40951 94 Slot Zero right side LUN Peer Slot One left side RvEZ Disks Microcode Version Unbound Disks Status area displays status of the selected item The Storage Utility user interface includes a tree
204. erver PC You can also enter IP addresses for other SNMP managers to which you want to send SNMP trap messages 6 Click OK and OK to save settings and close 7 For a level 3R RAID chassis with two controllers you must also configure network settings on the other controller You can do this when you configure the K2 media server connected to the other controller 8 In Storage Utility click View Refresh Continue with the next procedure Binding disk modules Binding disk modules Use the following procedure to bind disk modules as required for the level 3R storage system NOTE Binding destroys all user data on the disks 1 In the Storage Utility main window identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view In the following illustration disk numbers are represented by XX Refer to Identifying disks on page 290 for an explanation of how disks are actually numbered in Storage Utility November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 199 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System IE GYG Storage Utility _ 5 x File View Actions Tools Help Redundant systems store metadata files and journal files on the RAID chassis which requires a RAID 1 LUN two disks for metadata storage anda RAID 1 LUN two disks for journal storage These LUNs must be bound from the first four disks counting from left to right as you face the front of the RAID chassis in
205. ese procedures are for the HP ProCurve switch If you are using the Cisco Catalyst switch make connections and settings to provide the same functionality Refer to the documentation you received with the switch as necessary Use CATS or higher cables The maximum cable length is 50 meters Assign an IP address and logon to the switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection on page 56 Set up VLANs on the switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch VLANs on page 58 Install the switch in its permanent location Provide power to the switch Connect cables as follows Media Ports 1 19 odd Cr BOE oe oO ole oO Control Ports 2 20 even To the media ports make one connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client and two connections from the media server To the control ports make a connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client from the media server from the RAID storage chassis and from the control point PC Refer to Level 2 system description on page 54 for a diagram of the complete system Refer to cabling procedures later in this chapter for the GigE connections at each of the devices of the K2 Storage System Also refer to K2 Ethernet switch description on page 225 Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection Use a direct console connection to the switch start a console session and access the Switch Setup
206. ess EE 168 100 41 Subnet Address 255 255 254 U SNMF Configuration 0 0 Trap Address 1 10 16 HA 43 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OF Cancel Enter the control network IP address and other network settings Click OK and OK to save settings and close Binding disk modules Configuring RAID You want SNMP trap messages go to the NetCentral server PC so for SNMP Configuration enter the IP address of the NetCentral server PC You can also enter IP addresses for other SNMP managers to which you want to send SNMP trap In Storage Utility click View Refresh Continue with the next procedure Binding disk modules Use the following procedure to bind disk modules as required for the level 2 storage system NOTE Binding destroys all user data on the disks 1 In the Storage Utility main window identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by November 23 2005 their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view In the following illustration disk numbers are represented by XX Refer to Identifying disks on page 290 for an explanation of how disks are actually numbered in Storage Utility K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 79 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System f GYG Storage Utility File View Actions Tools Help Number of disks 2 To bind unbound disks for media storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs
207. et Switch C Fibre Channel Switch C K2 Media Client C SCSI Client Cancel 3 Select iSCSI Client 4 Click OK The new iSCSI client appears in the tree view 5 Configure the iSCSI client as appropriate 266 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Removing a K2 Storage System Adding an Ethernet switch The requirements for adding a Gigabit Ethernet switch to an existing K2 Storage System are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e The devices of the K2 Storage System do not need to be offline and there is no restart of devices required To add a Gigabit Ethernet switch to an existing K2 Storage System do the following 1 In the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree 2 Click Add Device The Add Device dialog box opens 3 Select Ethernet Switch 4 Click OK The new switch appears in the tree view 5 Configure the switch as appropriate Adding a K2 Media Server Adding a K2 Media Server to an existing K2 Storage System is not supported as a customer procedure This is because adding a K2 Media Server fundamentally changes the baseline design of the system which means you must dismantle the existing system and create a new system This requires custom design and implementation services that should only be attempted by qualified
208. etCentral monitoring which already has RW permissions set as required by NetCentral proceed to the next step 16 Enter the SNMP community and IP address of the NetCentral server PC For example if the IP address is 192 168 40 11 and the community is public you type the following snmp server host public 192 168 40 11 17 Enable Authentication traps by typing the following snmp server enable traps authentication This allows NetCentral to test the switch to verify that it can send its SNMP trap messages to NetCentral 18 Type menu to get to menu mode 19 If you need trunks to gang switches together using 1 Gig connections do the following Note This is not required if you use the 10 Gig ISL connections Select Switch Configuration o D Choose selection 2 Port Trunk Settings Press the right arrow key to choose Edit then press Enter Q O Down arrow until at the bottom of the list of ports Right arrow over to the Group column mh Use the Space bar and set the bottom port to Trk1 Set the next port up also to Trk1 gt ga Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 9 Choose Reboot Switch to restart the switch 10 You can now use the switch s web browser interface for further configuration as instructed in the next procedure 11 Close the P
209. ever the restart at the end of the Configure K2 Server wizard suffices so you do not need to restart now 6 Close the Storage Utility 7 Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server Part 2 Configuring the media server Part 2 1 Return to the Configure K2 Server page from which you launched Storage Utility and proceed as described in the following table November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 83 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System 84 On this page Do this File System Server Configuration This page checks on the configuration of the media server in one of its main roles as a file system server The media server also functions as a file system client which is also checked from this page S File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure the storage system and file system Launch Storage Utility File system server 1 File system client parameters M Shared file system client configuration fia 16 40 145 lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration is correct click Next If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions rela
210. ew select the media server you are configuring as server 2B 2 Click the Configure button The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the server for a level 3R K2 Storage System as described in the following table Some screens require no input from you as they are based on the configurations already completed on a previously configured 214 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 media server Configuring the redundant media server 2B On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles a x Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below SNFS file system server Iv iSCSI bridge Media database server M FTP server IV NAS server lt Back Cancel Enter the name for the media server This should be the current network name of the machine For level 3 redundant select iSCSI bridge FTP server and NAS server Click Next Software Configuration This page checks for the software required to support the roles you selected on the previous page HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 i E x M Installed software Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Operating System Microsoft R Windows Ri Server
211. f the IP addresses of the adapters Later in this procedure you must assign the replacement adapter the same IP address as currently assigned to the faulty adapter 2 Take the clients of the K2 Storage System offline and take all K2 Media Servers out of service November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Power down the K2 Media Server with the faulty iSCSI interface adapter and replace the iSCSI interface adapter Refer to the service documentation on the Dell Documentation CD for procedures Power up the K2 Media Server In the K2 System Configuration application open the iSCSI bridge page of the K2 Media Server It displays the replacement adapter identified by MAC address with its IP address set to 0 0 0 0 Assign the replacement adapter the same IP address as originally assigned to the faulty adapter Restart the K2 Media Server to put the change into effect Place the K2 Media Server or Servers in service Refer to procedures earlier in this chapter as appropriate for your K2 Storage System level and or redundant server configuration Recovering from a failed K2 Media Server system battery When the system battery in a K2 Media Server fails non rechargeable the system configuration is lost and the system will not complete startup processes when the battery is replaced To recover from a failed battery do the following
212. fault Windows Administrator username and password to log in to applications and machines as you work on your K2 Storage System However for ongoing security you should change the username password and or create unique accounts with similar privileges When you do this you must ensure that the accounts are present locally on all K2 Storage System machines including control point PCs K2 Media Servers K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients NetCentral also has accounts for security levels as follows e NetCentral Administrator e NetCentral Technician e NetCentral User Refer to the NetCentral User Guide for more information The NetCentral Administrator account maps to the K2 Administrator account and the NetCentral User account maps to the K2 User account Account information is passed between NetCentral and the K2 System Configuration application Virus scanning and protection policies The K2 Media Client and K2 Media Server is based on a standard Windows operating system platform It is important to defend this system against virus or SpyWare attacks Grass Valley supports the scanning of system drives the disk drives or drive partition used to house the operating system and installed application software from 262 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Virus scanning and protection policies a PC that is running the scanning program while the K2 computers are being used to record or play video to air The
213. fers Standard IT networked storage configurations to fit a wide variety of size and performance requirements Scaling from 100 to lt LOOOMB s Redundancy and fault recovery with no single point of failure Tuned and optimized file system for reliable and robust transaction of media files Best in class storage management for high throughput deterministic performance with load balancing K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 23 Chapter 1 Product Description 24 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 2 Installing the Level 1 Storage System Use this chapter to install the K2 Level 1 L1 storage system This chapter includes the following topics e Level 1 system description on page 26 e Preparing level 1 devices on page 26 e Networking for level 1 on page 36 e Configuring the level 1 storage system on page 40 e Adding K2 Storage System clients on page 51 e Basic operations for level 1 storage on page 51 Work through these topics sequentially to install the storage system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 25 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Level 1 system description Multiple iSCSI clients 01 U0D eEIp N iw E Gigabit Ethernet switch Control point PC dl4 oju09 eipeyy L1 RAID chassis The level one storage sy
214. fers and FTP traffic e Control network For all other non streaming non iSCSI traffic e Networks must be on separate subnets e The media GSCSI network is 100 physically separate This separation is provided by dedicated Gigabit ports cables and by VLANs on a single switch or by separate switches e The streaming network and the control network are also physically separated by dedicated ports and cables but the traffic can be mixed on the same VLAN or switch e Static IP addresses are required for the media network on K2 Storage System iSCSI devices This includes the iSCSI clients connected to the storage such as K2 Media Clients and NewsEdits and the K2 Media Servers e Machine names host names assigned to each K2 device e Host tables hosts files provide name resolution for the media network on each K2 Media Client iSCSI client and K2 Media Server e IP addresses for FTP streaming ports must have name resolution such that hostnames are appended with the _heO suffix You can use host tables as in Setting up host tables on page 70 or another mechanism to provide the name resolution This directs the streaming traffic to the correct port Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for a complete explanation e Only K2 Media Servers need to be on the streaming network This is because all streaming traffic goes directly to the shared storage e On the K2 Media Client the four GigE ports are configured as tw
215. figured first which is designated as server 1 server A or server 1A depending on the level of the system If there is another instance of the K2 System Configuration application on a different control point PC currently accessing the K2 Storage System a message informs you of this and you are not allowed to access the system If access 1s allowed a Retrieving Configuration message box shows progress It can take over 30 seconds to retrieve the configuration When the configuration 1s retrieved the K2 Storage System appears in the tree view Make sure that you only attempt view only operations from this PC Do not configure the K2 Storage System from this PC 4 Repeat the previous steps for other control point PCs from which you need access to the K2 Storage System When you expand and select nodes in the tree view to view K2 Storage Systems individual devices and configuration settings the K2 System Configuration application displays information as found in a configuration file rather than continuously polling devices to get their latest information The configuration file is saved on the V drive along with the media files in the shared storage system When you use the Retrieve Configuration feature you are connecting to the configuration file 268 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Reconnecting to a K2 Storage System Reconnecting to a K2 Storage System If you replace the K2 System Configuration cont
216. follows ISCO interface cards GigE media Fibre Channel Os ae o o o E A SS So MEL Keyboard Power Serial port VGA monitor FTP cash USB oun Connect the two iSCSI interface adapters to media ports on the GigE switch Connect the motherboard GigE port 1 and GigE port 2 to control ports on the GigE switch Connect one of the Fibre Channel ports to the RAID storage device Make a direct connection between the serial ports of redundant server pairs Connect server 1A to server 1B and connect server 2A to server 2B e Assign a control network IP address to GigE port 1 Use standard Windows procedures Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Configure SNMP properties so the trap destination points to the NetCentral server PC If you are not using the SNMP community name public configure the community name and set permissions to RW Also make sure that the Authentication trap is enabled Also refer to K2 Media Server description on page 226 180 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the L3R RAID chassis Setting up the L3R RAID chassis Do the following to prepare the L3R RAID storage devices Install the chassis in its permanent location Refer to the L3R RAID Instruction Manual for rack mount instructions Assign Fibre Channel address ID on page 182 Connect the L3R RAID chassis
217. g devices to a K2 Storage System on page 265 e Removing a K2 Storage System on page 267 e Accessing a K2 Storage System from multiple PCs on page 268 e Reconnecting to a K2 Storage System on page 269 e Taking a K2 Storage System offline on page 269 e Bringing a K2 Storage System online on page 269 Accessing K2 Storage System features In the K2 Configuration Application features for modifying K2 Storage System settings are as follows Select the K2 To make these Storage System features available C O TE 3 Ja H amp 2 f a New K2 Syster Retrieve Configuration Take Offline Remove Add Device Storage Utility Rename Server Control Panel Je 10 16 40 67 GESwitch1 K2System1 10 16 40 66 Renaming a K2 Storage System The requirements for renaming an existing K2 Storage System are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e The devices of the K2 Storage System do not need to be offline and there is no restart of devices required To rename an existing K2 Storage System do the following 1 In the tree view select the current name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree 2 Click Rename The Rename dialog box opens 3 Enter the new name of the storage system and click Apply Adding devices to a K2 Storage System Refer
218. g unreferenced files and movies These procedures allow you to keep the media database and the media files in sync You can check the movies clips in the media database for the references to media files that should be currently stored on the media disks Likewise you can check for November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 285 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System media files that are not referenced by a movie in the media database If you find any unreferenced files or movies you can delete them The requirements for these procedures are as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be offline To clean unreferenced files do the following 1 Click Tools Clean Unreferenced Files 2 A message box appears searching Please wait Observe progress 3 A message box reports results Respond as follows e If no unreferenced files are found click OK to dismiss the results e Ifunreferenced files are discovered you are prompted to delete them Click Yes to delete the files or No to leave the files intact To clean unreferenced movies do the following 1 Click Tools Clean Unreferenced Movies 2 A message box appears searching
219. gE switches 10 You can now use the switch s web browser interface for further configuration as instructed in the next procedure 11 Close the PC terminal program and disconnect the console cable 12 Repeat this procedure on the other switch Continue with the next procedure Configuring the GigE switch VLANs Configuring the GigE switch VLANs For redundant systems with two switches do the following on each switch The following steps are for the HP ProCurve switch Accomplish tasks similarly on a Cisco switch 1 From the control point PC or another PC make sure that you have a direct Ethernet cable connection to the switch with no other switches or networking devices in between 2 On the PC open Internet Explorer and type the switch s IP address in the Address field as in the following example http 192 168 100 61 This should be the name or IP address as currently configured on the switch 3 Press Enter to open the switch s configuration application NOTE The configuration application for the HP ProCurve switch requires Java You can also access the switch s configuration application from the K2 System Configuration application 4 In the switch s configuration application choose Configuration then Port Configuration sw Status Non Critical HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G entity Stats Configuration SPCHITTY Diagnosics SiUppori Device View Fault Detection System Info IP
220. ge checks for the software required to support the roles you selected on the previous page HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 6 xj Installed software Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Operating System Microsoft R Windows Ri Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Goon Moon software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DX KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID On this page Do this Network Configuration S Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 K x This page displays the m Network Configuration control network Ethernet The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device ou can modify the Rn IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the port and
221. ght arrow key to choose Edit then press Enter 176 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 3R redundant GigE switches d Down arrow until at the bottom of the list of ports e Right arrow over to the Group column a Use the Space bar and set the bottom port to Trk1 Set the next port up also to Trk1 o gt ga Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 9 Choose Reboot Switch to restart the switch 10 You can now use the switch s web browser interface for further configuration as instructed in the next procedure 11 Close the PC terminal program and disconnect the console cable 12 Repeat this procedure on the other switch Continue with the next procedure Configuring the GigE switch VLANs Configuring the GigE switch VLANs For redundant systems with two switches do the following on each switch The following steps are for the HP ProCurve switch Accomplish tasks similarly on a Cisco switch 1 From the control point PC or another PC make sure that you have a direct Ethernet cable connection to the switch with no other switches or networking devices in between 2 On the PC open Internet Explorer and type the switch s IP address in the Address field as in the following example http 192 168 100 61 This should be the name or IP
222. guration then Port Configuration 30 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 1 GigE switch sw Status Non Critical HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 246 identity SUS Configuration SECUNY Diz agnUSICS SUppOTI pescevew FowtDeecion Systemi P Comtguraton ETT a Monitor Port Device Features __ Stacking _VLAN Configuration _SupportMgmt URL Port Port Enabled Config Flow pe Mode Control 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 4100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 00 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1000T Yes Auto Enable 4100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 4100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 100 1 000T Yes Auto Enable 1001 000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T Yes Auto Enable 10071000T 1 2 3 4 5 16 7 E Modify Selected Ports 5 Select all ports leave Mode as default of Auto and set Flow Control to Enable 6 Choose VLAN Configuration If prompted log in with the switch s administrator username and password sw1 Status Non Critical HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G6 O gt idemity Configuration SECUY Di AONOSTICS Suppor _DeviceView i _FaultDetection OA IP Configuration _Port Configuration _Monitor Pot _DeviceFeature
223. guration application To maintain a valid K2 Storage System all configuration must be controlled and tracked through the K2 System Configuration application Refer to Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System for procedures for using Storage Utility NetCentral NetCentral is Grass Valley s monitoring application and is required on a K2 Storage System The NetCentral server component runs on a NetCentral server PC which could also be a K2 system control point PC The devices of the K2 Storage System report status primarily via Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP to NetCentral on the NetCentral server PC You must get the NetCentral system installed and running and you must be fully monitoring the K2 configuration control point PC with NetCentral before you begin configuring the K2 Storage System with the K2 System Configuration application Refer to Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral in the installation chapter earlier in this manual for more information 238 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 NetCentral Refer to the NetCentral User Guide to get the NetCentral system installed and operating You must install a NetCentral device provider on the NetCentral server PC for each type of device you are monitoring For detailed information about setting up and monitoring each type of device go to the NetCentral Help menu and read the online help for the device type November 23
224. guration application on the control point PC and do the following 1 Make sure you know the load balancing bandwidth parameters for each of the iSCSI clients as you must re enter these values later in this procedure 2 Put all the devices of the K2 storage system in an offline or out of service state Refer to the appropriate procedures in this chapter 3 Remove all iSCSI clients from the K2 Storage System To do this select each iSCSI client and click Remove 4 In the tree view expand the node for the media server or level 1 RAID storage device that has the iSCSI interface adapter for which you need to change the IP address and click the iSCSI Bridge node The iSCSI Bridge Server configuration page opens 5 Select the iSCSI adapter for which you need to change the IP address and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply 6 Add each iSCSI client again and reconfigure Make sure you enter the same bandwidth values load balancing for each client as the values originally configured 7 Place the devices of the K2 Storage System back online Replacing an iSCSI interface adapter TOE card If you must replace one of the iSCSI interface adapters TOE cards in a K2 Media Server do the following 1 In the K2 System Configuration application for the K2 Media Server with the faulty iSCSI interface adapter open the iSCSI bridge page and make a note o
225. guration control point PC must be added to the NetCentral system and fully monitored by NetCentral This especially means that its SNMP trap destination is set to send SNMP traps to the NetCentral server PC This is critical as a SNMP trap is used as the mechanism by which the K2 configuration information is communicated to NetCentral Whether the control point PC and the NetCentral server PC are the same PC or are different PCs you must still add the control point PC to NetCentral In addition NetCentral automatically changes its view of the K2 Storage System whenever you use the K2 System Configuration application to do one of the following e Remove a K2 Storage System e Rename a K2 Storage System e Add a device to a K2 Storage System e Remove a device from a K2 Storage System Refer to the NetCentral User Guide to set up the NetCentral system After installing a device provider you can find additional documentation about monitoring that type of device on the NetCentral Help menu Networking for level 1 Use the topics in this section to configure the Gigabit Ethernet GigE network for the level 1 storage system Networking requirements on page 36 Networking tips on page 37 Setting up host tables on page 38 Testing the control network on page 39 Networking requirements Required networking strategies for a K2 Storage System are as follows e Three networks e Media network Exclusively fo
226. gure the K2 Storage System information is automatically sent to NetCentral When NetCentral receives the information it adds devices and populates its interface with a view of the K2 Storage System Before you begin using the K2 System Configuration application to configure the storage system you must set up the NetCentral system according to the following requirements e NetCentral installed NetCentral server software must be installed on a NetCentral server PC This can be the K2 configuration control point PC or another PC that has network communication with the K2 Storage System control network e Device providers installed A device provider must be installed on the NetCentral server PC for each type of device in the K2 Storage System For a level 3 storage system the following device providers must be installed e Control point PC device provider This is the Windows monitoring device provider e K2 Media Server device provider e HP Gigabit Switch device provider or Cisco Gigabit Switch device provider e K2 Media Client device provider if any K2 Media Clients are accessing the level 3 storage system e Device provider for iSCSI clients if any iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are accessing the level 3 storage system e K2 Level 3 RAID storage device provider e Grass Valley PC Monitoring software installed This software must be installed on the K2 configuration control point PC It includes Grass Valley SNMP agents
227. gured your first media server server 1 you next configure the other media server server 2 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the media server you are configuring as server 2 2 Click the Configure button The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the server for a level 3 K2 Storage System as described in the following table Some screens require no input from you as they are based on the configurations already completed on a previously configured media server On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles p i x m Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure m Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below SNFS file system server V iSCSI bridge J Media database server Iv FTP server IV NAS server Bact Cancel Enter the name for the media server This should be the current network name of the machine For level 3 select iSCSI bridge FTP server and NAS server Click Next Software Configuration This page checks for the software required to support the roles you selected on the previous page HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 Eo x Installed software Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Operating System Microsoft R Windo
228. h Ethernet cables connected Control network IP address assigned VLANs set up Power on L1 RAID chassis Software installed as from the factory Ethernet cable s connected Control network IP address assigned Power on K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Defining a new K2 Storage System Defining a new K2 Storage System Define a level 1 K2 Storage System as follows 1 On the control point PC open the K2 System Configuration application A login dialog box opens Please enter the administrative account name and password that will be used to configure the K2 sustems User name Password Ok Cancel 2 Log in to the K2 System Configuration application with the Windows adminstrator account By default this as follows e Username administrator e Password adminKk2 Refer to Setting up application security on page 262 for more information about administrator accounts and logging in to applications Jh K2 System Configuration File K2System Device Help Ja i New K2 System Retrieve Configuration 3 Click New K2 System The New K2 System wizard opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 41 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Follow the on screen text to define your level 1 K2 Storage System as described in the following table On this page Do this Page 1 HE New K2 System Page 1 Welcome to the New K2 System
229. h media server also runs the software components that allow it to function in its specific roles The L3 RAID chassis is connected via a Fibre Channel connection to each media server These connections access the disks simultaneously providing increased bandwidth The L3 RAID chassis is also connected to the GigE control network which is required for SNMP NetCentral monitoring 132 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Preparing level 3 devices The K2 configuration control point PC is connected to the GigE control network The K2 System Configuration application runs on this PC for configuring the storage system Refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices for more information Preparing level 3 devices Use the topics in this section to prepare each device so that it is ready to become part of the level 3 storage system e Setting up the control point PC on page 133 e Setting up the level 3 GigE switch on page 134 e Setting up the K2 media server on page 139 e Setting up the L3 RAID chassis on page 140 e Preparing K2 Storage System clients on page 144 Setting up the control point PC To set up the K2 configuration control point PC you have the following options e Use the Grass Valley control point PC that comes from the factory with software pre installed This includes the K2 System Configuration application remote AppCenter and NetCentral software e Use a P
230. he Switch Setup screen to set the IP address The following procedure is for the HP ProCurve switch If you have a Cisco switch accomplish the same tasks as appropriate Consult the documentation that came with the switch for more information 1 Configure the PC terminal emulator on the control point PC or another PC as a DEC VT 100 ANSI terminal or use a VT 100 terminal and configure either one to operate with these settings e Baud rate 9600 e 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and flow control set to Xon Xoff e Also disable uncheck the Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows option 2 Connect the PC to the switch s Console Port using the console cable included with the switch 3 Turn on the PC s power and start the PC terminal program 4 Press Enter two or three times and you will see the copyright page and the message Press any key to continue Press a key and you will then see the switch console command CLI prompt 5 At the prompt enter setup to display the Switch Setup screen 6 Tab to the IP Config DHCP Bootp field and use the Space bar to select the Manual option 7 Tab to the IP Address field and enter the switch s control network IP address Refer to Networking tips on page 32 8 Tab to the Subnet Mask field and enter the subnet mask used for your network 9 Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command
231. he NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions e For K2 Media Clients refer to K2 Media Client System Guide for instructions Basic operations for level 2 storage Use the following procedures as you work on your level 2 storage system e Level 2 power off procedure e Level 2 power on procedure e Using FTP for file transfer For other procedures refer to Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System on page 261 Level 2 power off procedure Use the following sequence to power off the level 2 storage system 1 Power off all K2 Media clients or other iSCSI clients 2 Shut down the K2 Media Server 3 Power off the RAID controller chassis If expansion chassis are connected make sure the power off of the controller chassis is prior to or simultaneous with the power off of its connected expansion chassis Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk drives to spin down before proceeding 4 Power off all Ethernet switches 5 Power off the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC if necessary Level 2 power on procedure Use the following steps to power on the level 2 storage system Device Verification instructions l Power on the control point After log on start NetCentral NetCentral reports devices as PC and or the NetCentral offline As each device is powered on check NetCentral to verify server PC the device s status 86 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November
232. he VLAN Name field enter Media c In the VLAN ID field enter 60 d Click Add VLAN e Click Main Screen to return to VLAN Configuration 8 Configure the Media VLAN as follows a In the Media VLAN row click Modify 138 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the K2 media server Modify Port VLAN Configuration Port Current Mode VLAN ID 60 Untagged No VLAN NAME Media Untagged Untagged MODE No Untagged No Untagged No Untagged No Select All Apply Cancel 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 b Select all the odd numbered ports Tip Use Ctrl Click c In the Mode drop down list select Untagged then click Apply This removes the odd ports from the default Control VLAN d Click the VLAN Configuration tab 9 Close the switch configuration application Setting up the K2 media server Do the following to prepare each K2 media server e Install the server in its permanent location Refer to the rack mount instructions that you received with the server s product bundle e Provide power to the servers e Connect cables as follows ISCO interface Cards GigE media Fibre Channel GD omo omo O G 06 E Ea cea ca a ey so EL Keyboard M ower Serial port VGA monitor FTP ental ues ouse Connect the two iSCSI interface adapters to media ports on the GigE switch Connect th
233. he add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 47 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Progress Report Ol x Current Status Busy Commands List StartTime Binding LUN on Controlled In progress 16 48 45 Binding LUN on Contraller0 In progress 16 48 52 cas Binding LUN on Controller In progress 16 46 59 cas Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 07 fre Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 75 ere Binding LUN on Controller0 In progress 16 49 23 ere f Close the Progress Report and repeat these steps for other unbound disks When you are done you should have the following results For level one storage you should have six RAID 1 LUNs of two disks each on a RAID storage device That is one system LUN and five media LUNs g Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window NOTE Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding 5 Restart the K2 Level 1 RAID storage device 6 Continue with the next procedure Creating a new file system Creating a new fil
234. he control network IP address to the control port and update the host file Refer to Networking for level 1 on page 36 e Set the SNMP trap destination to point to the NetCentral server PC In NetCentral click Help Device Providers for instructions Your preparations for L1 RAID storage are now complete Preparing K2 Storage System clients Any devices that function as iSCSI clients to the K2 Storage System must be prepared with the following requirements e One or more connections to the control network e A static IP address for the control network e One or more connections to the media ASCSI network Additional steps that are required for NewsEdits include the following e Implement NewsEdit security features For more information refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide Additional steps that are required for K2 Media Clients include the following e If the K2 Media Client connects to the K2 Storage System with a redundant Ethernet fabric such as in Levels 2R and 3R install Multi path I O software For more information refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral As you configure the K2 Storage System information is automatically sent to NetCentral When NetCentral receives the information it adds devices and populates its interface with a view of the K2 Storage System Before you begin using the K2 System Configuration application to configure the storage system y
235. his procedure are as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher 292 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Binding LUNs e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be shut down To bind a LUN do the following 1 In the tree view right click the Unbound node and select Bind LUN Peer controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected as a pair The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Bind LUN 5 x LUM Tyoe RAID 5 M Full Bind Avallable Disks Selected Disks Flash the drive lights Identify 2 Configure the Full Bind checkbox as follows e Ifyou are binding all the LUNs for a new or a reconfigured storage system leave Full Bind selected To do a Full Bind the K2 Storage System must be in the offline mode e If you are adding LUNs to an existing storage system you can uncheck Full Bind This allows a background bind process With a background bind the binding process runs on the new LUNs while media access continues on the existing LUNs of the storage system You can do a background bind while the K2 Storage System is in the online mode 3 In the LUN TYPE drop down box select the
236. hone during business hours Afterhours phone support is available for warranty and contract customers United States Latin America Eastern Europe Southern Europe Middle East Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Denmark Dubai Finland Authorized Support Representative 800 547 8949 Toll Free 800 547 8949 Toll Free 49 6155 870 606 33 1 34 20 77 77 33 1 34 20 77 77 61 1300 721 495 32 2 3349031 55 11 5509 3440 800 547 8949 Toll Free 86 106615 9450 45 45968800 971 4 299 64 40 35 9 68284600 France Germany Greece Hong Kong Italy Netherlands Poland Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland UK 33 1 34 20 77 77 49 6155 870 606 33 1 34 20 77 77 852 2531 3058 39 06 8720351 31 35 6238421 49 6155 870 606 49 6155 870 606 656379 1390 34 91 512 03 50 46 87680705 41 1 487 80 02 44 870 903 2022 A local authorized support representative may be available in your country To locate the support representative for your country visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 19 Finding Information 20 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 1 Product Description This chapter describes the K2 Storage System as follows e Overview Description on page 22 e Key features on page 23 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual
237. ick OK to continue The RAID controller is disabled You can check controller status in the Storage Utility You may need to refresh the display NOTE If you accidentally disable the wrong controller you can enable it again by removing it and then replacing it in the chassis 4 Remove and replace the disabled RAID controller module Refer to procedures in the Instruction Manual for your level of RAID storage chassis 5 On inserting the replacement RAID controller it initializes and is automatically enabled to become the backup RAID controller Configuring Level 2 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings Through Storage Utility you can configure the following settings on a RAID chassis e IP address e Subnet mask e Gateway Address 298 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring Level 3 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings e SNMP trap destinations For the Level 2 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings are set and stored on the LAN card Therefore if the RAID chassis has two RAID controllers they are configured as a single device as in the following procedure 1 In the Storage Utility right click the icon for a RAID controller and select Configuration Network Properties The Network Settings dialog box opens A Controller Network Settings _ Network Configuration IP Address EE 168 100 5I Subnet Address 255 255 254 SNMF Configuration o ao a 0
238. ics in this section to configure the Gigabit Ethernet GigE network for the level 3 storage system e Networking requirements on page 147 e Networking tips on page 148 e Setting up host tables on page 148 e Testing the control network on page 149 Networking requirements Required networking strategies for a K2 Storage System are as follows Three networks e Media network Exclusively for iSCSI traffic e Streaming network For media transfers and FTP traffic e Control network For all other non streaming non iSCSI traffic Networks must be on separate subnets The media GQSCSI network is 100 physically separate This separation is provided by dedicated Gigabit ports cables and by VLANs on a single switch or by separate switches The streaming network and the control network are also physically separated by dedicated ports and cables but the traffic can be mixed on the same VLAN or switch Static IP addresses are required for the media network on K2 Storage System iSCSI devices This includes the iSCSI clients connected to the storage such as K2 Media Clients and NewsEdits and the K2 Media Servers Machine names host names assigned to each K2 device Host tables hosts files provide name resolution for the media network on each K2 Media Client iSCSI client and K2 Media Server IP addresses for FTP streaming ports must have name resolution such that hostnames are appended with the
239. iets eccadeetDecesenadelcsbesigeeiueac nest dieeeendoed 219 Using FP TOIMETAN Se rics watecheess ees cece dane et eel A ede tenia hl ani eat aa 220 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices Control Dont PC descripto een eer euler es a uiieaes bes 224 Control point PC system requirements ccceecceccceeeeecseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeess 224 K2 Ethernet switch description n ccav cnc eeodirm cen iridedeeedinien Met dheeeed eee 225 K2 Ethernet switch specifications ccccccseeceeeceeeeeceeseeeeeeeseseeeessaaeeeesaneeesesaaes 225 K2 Media Server descriptio sii n e e a a ia 226 K2 Media Server specifications cc cceeeeccccecceceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaaaas 226 K2 Level 1 RAID storage description ccceeccceeccseeseeececeeeseeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeesaseeeeess 228 K2 Level 1 RAID specifications ccccccccsseeeecceeseeeceeeeeeeeceaseeecsueeesseaneeesesaees 228 K2 Level 2 RAID storage description cccceecccecceeseeeececeeseeeeceeeeeseeeeeesaesseeeeess 230 K2 Level 2 RAID SDCCINCATIOINS sssi a a a A 231 K2 Level 3 RAID storage description cececcceecceesseeececeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeesseseeeeees 232 K2 Level 3 RAID specifications ccccccccseseeeccessececceeeeeeeceesseessueeeeesaneeesssages 233 Chapter 8 Overview of K2 Storage Tools K2 System COnmouUratio Ms serr e a e Ode aatedlectennasdundesdasentes 235 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manua
240. iguration 3 Click New K2 System The New K2 System wizard opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 193 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Follow the on screen text to define your level 3R K2 Storage System as described in the following table On this page Do this Page 1 Fl New K2 System Page 1 E x Welcome to the New K2 System Wizard This wizard defines the type and number of devices on your K2 system Name Enter a name for the K2 system System configuration C Level1 Select the type of K2 system you are creating C Level 2 Level 3 Custom Nearline Server redundancy IV Check this option if this system has failover capabilities lt Back Cancel Create a name for your level 3R K2 Storage System and type it in the Name box Select Level 3 Select the Server redundancy option Click Next Page 2 HE New K2 system Page 2 A ET 10 16 40 145 Device Assignment For the standard configurations the number of servers and switches is fixed Define the number of clients on this K2 system by selecting the appropriate device type and clicking the Select button Available device types Number of devices K2 Media Server ga K2 Media Server K2 Media Clien Ethernet Switch a K2 Media Server Ga K2 Media Clien K2 Media Client a K2 Media Server a K2 Media Server eP Ethernet Switch EP Ethernet Swi
241. iguration application you can click the Configure Switch button to open the switch s web configuration application Refer to the installation procedures earlier in this document for switch configuration information for levels 1 through 3R storage systems November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 301 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System 302 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Index Symbols NET Framework 245 _heO 37 69 104 147 188 255 Numerics 100BaseT 263 15K rpm drives 200 A Acronis 248 administrator privileges 262 anti virus 263 AppCenter 280 AppServer 242 art 237 Authentication trap 61 98 139 180 Authentication traps 29 58 94 136 176 backup and recovery 246 battery 278 battery replacement 10 bind LUNs background 293 C C drive 246 CAT5 27 CD software 241 certifications and compliances 11 Cisco Catalyst 3750 Gigabit Ethernet switch 225 Cisco Catalyst switch 27 Cisco switch 28 56 93 134 175 configuration file 236 268 Configure K2 Server 214 console connection to the switch 28 56 93 134 175 Control network 36 69 104 147 188 control network IP address 125 166 209 213 216 Control point PC system requirements 224 control point PC description 224 Grass Valley 27 55 91 133 173 224 November 23 2005 system requirements 27 55 91 133 173 Control Point software 241 installing 243 controller logs 291
242. ilable until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions related to this message later in the procedure 216 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Adding K2 Storage System clients On this page Do this SCSI Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapter and the page validates that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HS iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 M Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge C Primary C Backup iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address Haj and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed 00cUdd01 2124 192 168 100 10 209 205 205 0 OMB sec cccoccoccoccocecococcscoocccecocecccosooceeeoosoososoeeecocoosccccecoosocoocecceosocsecocoeceeooossecooeeeooooscccccocesoocccsecccoocecccoccecceeooeoesoeceeeooooeeccceoecesecocccccooceosococcecoceosssesooeesoooosesccceosoeososececcocossssscececosossso 00cO0dd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMB sec Modify View Target Drives Check Fibre Channel adapter Grass V
243. ile system and database While most configuration and service work can be accomplished on a backup server without affecting the operation of the Storage System if you attempt configuration or service work on the operating primary server it will likely result in record play failures and or a loss of media To identify the current primary backup K2 Media Server use one or more of the methods described in the following procedures Identifying primary backup from NetCentral While monitoring the K2 Media Server in NetCentral do the following 1 In the NetCentral tree view select the K2 Media Server 2 Click the Facility view control button 3 Open the Roles subsystem 4 Click the Media Database Server link The Media Database Server dialog box opens and reports the Failover Mode as either Primary or Backup Identifying primary backup from the K2 System Configuration application 1 In the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree 2 Click the Server Control Panel button The Server Control Panel opens 270 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Identifying current primary backup K2 Media Servers If your K2 Storage System does not have redundant servers only the left panel one server appears Server Cont K2seryerl K2server D This Failover Monitor is running D Thi Failover Monitor is running This File System Server ts primary This Fil
244. ile using Notepad or some other text editing application C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts 2 Enter all IP addresses with machine names The text format is simple First type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Then type the machine name Here is an example ie reel Gods ene see reed Be root server 1 MZ Aee eZ root Server 1 LO Zc 6 Oo LUO SLI root server l TE AG Beg L0 LA root server 1 hed LO 68200 51 root raid 1 192 168 10061 root gige 1 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 4 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machines This is easier than editing the file on each machine Testing the control network To test the control network use the ping command as follows 1 On the control point PC click Start Run The Run dialog box opens 2 Type cmd and click OK The command prompt window opens 3 Type ping then a space then the name of one of your K2 Storage System devices such as the Gigabit Ethernet switch as in the following example ping root gige 1 4 Press Enter The ping command should return the IP address of the device as in the following example Pinging root gige 1 mycorp com 192 168 100 61 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 127 106 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Testing the control network Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 6
245. information about administrator accounts and logging in to applications Jh K2 System Configuration File K2System Device Help Ja i New K2 System Retrieve Configuration 3 Click New K2 System The New K2 System wizard opens November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 109 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Follow the on screen text to define your level 2R K2 Storage System as described in the following table On this page Do this Page 1 Fl New K2 System Page 1 E x Welcome to the New K2 System Wizard This wizard defines the type and number of devices on your K2 system Name Enter a name for the K2 system System configuration C Level Select the type of K2 system you are creating Level 2 C Level 3 C Custom C Nearline Server redundancy IV Check this option if this system has failover capabilities lt Back Cancel Create a name for your level 2R K2 Storage System and type it in the Name box Select Level 2 Select the Server redundancy option Click Next Page 2 HE New K2 system Page 2 E x 10 16 40 145 Device Assignment For the standard configurations the number of servers and switches is fixed Define the number of clients on this K2 system by selecting the appropriate device type and clicking the Select button Available device types Number of devices K2 Media Server BS cS K2 Media Server Ether
246. ing a device provider you can find additional documentation about monitoring that type of device on the NetCentral Help menu Networking for level 3R Use the topics in this section to configure the Gigabit Ethernet GigE network for the level 3R storage system e Networking requirements on page 188 e Networking tips on page 189 e Setting up host tables on page 190 e Testing the control network on page 190 Networking requirements Required networking strategies for a K2 Storage System are as follows 188 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Three networks e Media network Exclusively for iSCSI traffic e Streaming network For media transfers and FTP traffic e Control network For all other non streaming non iSCSI traffic Networks must be on separate subnets The media SCSI network is 100 physically separate This separation is provided by dedicated Gigabit ports cables and by VLANs on a single switch or by separate switches The streaming network and the control network are also physically separated by dedicated ports and cables but the traffic can be mixed on the same VLAN or switch Static IP addresses are required for the media network on K2 Storage System iSCSI devices This includes the iSCSI clients connected to the storage such as K2 Media Clients and NewsEdits and the K2 Media Servers Machine names host names assigned to each K2 device Host tables hosts files p
247. ing IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Server Configuration HE File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 F x Storage and shared file system server configuration 3 Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure the storage system and file system Launch Storage Utility Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 10 16 40 145 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Launch Storage Manager Storage Utility opens 3 Continue with the next procedure Configuring RAID to use Storage Utility to configure the storage and file system Leave the Configure K2 Server wizard open while you are using Storage Utility When you are done with Storage Utility you continue with the wizard as explained in Configuring the media server Part 2 on page 162 Configuring RAID Use Storage Utility to complete the configuration of the L3 RAID chassis as explained in the following topics e Configuring L3 RAID network and SNMP settings 156 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID e Binding disk modules Refer to Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 151 to confirm that the RAID storage is ready for configuration Configuring L3 RAID network and SNMP settings Use the Storage Utility to configure the
248. ing K2 Media Client software versions Your options for identifying K2 Media Client software version are as follows e In NetCentral select the Facility button then in the tree view open the node for the K2 Media Client This exposes the subsystems You can find software version information on property pages for the Software subsystem e In the K2 System Configuration application tree view open the node for the K2 Media Client This exposes the nodes for individual configuration pages Select the Software configuration page to view software version information To check for recent changes in software click the Check button Modifying K2 Media Client control network settings To modify the hostname or IP address of a K2 Media Client use the following procedure Refer to procedures elsewhere in this chapter for the details of individual steps 1 Make sure you know the load balancing bandwidth parameters currently set for the K2 Media Client in the K2 System Configuration application You must reconfigure these parameters later in this procedure 2 Remove the K2 Media Client from the K2 Storage System 3 Modify the hostname or IP address 4 Edit hosts files or other name resolution mechanisms for all the devices of the K2 Storage System 5 Add the K2 Media Client as a new device to the K2 Storage System load balancing the K2 Media Client just as it was previously This is important as you want the K2 System Configuration applic
249. ings to provide the same functionality Refer to the documentation you received with the switch as necessary Use CATS or higher cables The maximum cable length is 50 meters Assign an IP address and logon to the switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection on page 134 Set up VLANs on the switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch VLANs on page 136 Install the switch in its permanent location Provide power to the switch Connect cables as follows Media Ports 1 19 odd ECO eeeeen TEEESIEEEESa ce oo ooo FS Control Ports 2 20 even To the media ports make one connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client and two connections from each media server To the control ports make one connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client from each media server from the RAID storage chassis and from the control point PC Refer to Level 3 system description on page 132 for a diagram of the complete system Refer to cabling procedures later in this chapter for the GigE connections at each of the devices of the K2 Storage System Also refer to K2 Ethernet switch description on page 225 Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection Use a direct console connection to the switch start a console session and access the Switch Setup screen to set the IP address The following procedure is for the HP ProCurve switch If you have a Cisco switch accomplish
250. injury remove jewelry such as rings watches and other metallic objects Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified Provide Proper Ventilation To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Safety Summaries Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Battery Replacement To avoid damage replace only with the same or equivalent type Dispose of used battery according to the circuit board manufacturer s instructions Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual A A These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that can result in personal injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to equipment or other property or which may cause equipment crucial to your business environment to become temporarily non operational Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the marking WARNING indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the ma
251. ion This page checks for the software required to support the roles you selected on the previous page HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 Installed software Operating System Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Microsoft R Windows R Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Koon XXX Software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DOK KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK KOK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next Network Configuration This page displays the control network Ethernet port and allows you to configure the FTP Streaming network Ethernet port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports HE Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 M Network Configuration YS The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device You can modify the IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DH
252. ion Manual 261 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Setting up application security The K2 System Configuration application and the Storage Utility application both require that you be logged in to the application with administrator privileges in order to modify any settings These privileges are based on the Windows account that you use when you log in to the K2 System Configuration application When you open Storage Utility from within the K2 System Configuration application the account information is passed to Storage Utility so you do not need to log in separately to Storage Utility You must use a Windows account that has local administrator privileges on the machine to be configured For example when you are on a control point PC and you run the K2 System Configuration application for the purpose of configuring a K2 Media Server the account with which you log in to the K2 System Configuration application must be present on the K2 Media Server and must have administrator privileges on the K2 Media Server By default all K2 Storage System machines are set up with the following accounts K2 Configuration Storage Utility Account Username Password permissions permissions Windows Administrator adminK2 Run change Run change Administrator K2 Administrator K2 Admin K2admin Run change Run change K2 User K2 User K2user No access No access For initial setup and configuration you can use the de
253. ion chassis Every chassis must have a chassis address The level three RAID chassis address is fixed at 0 so no configuration is required However if you have any L3R RAID Expansion chassis you must set their chassis addresses as shown in the following illustration Also verify that the diagnostic ID switches are in the position shown 184 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the L3R RAID chassis On each L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed set the same chassis address on both Expansion adapters The Expansion Chassis in this column are connected to DL1 If you have more chassis than shown here continue the numbering sequence as appropriate TES E gt i Pil Expansion Chassis Suse if installed Address 3 LIT O ooo 2 O P i Expansion Chassis If you have an Expansion Chassis anne if installed connected to DLO set the address Address 2 to one 2 O Seg h 00 ITT ves E O Lo fe ee o L EC J a KS GY X G aa Ol T La 5
254. ipe K2Disk JournalStripe JK2Disk1 OF Cancel 5 If you have RAID 1 LUNS assign a RAID 1 LUN as a metadata stripe and another 120 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 2 RAID 1 LUN as a journal stripe You can distinguish RAID 1 LUNs from media LUNs by the value in the Number of Sectors column 6 Click OK The Configuration File dialog box opens or Configuration File E K l0 x select Accept to acceptthe configuration file Cancel to abort making new file system Edit to editthe configuration file Windows ecurity FileLocks lnodeE pandMin lnodeE pandinc lnodeE pandM ay mt a JournalSize pad a at Accept Cancel Edit a at Luotas ma ae mae ae Debug Allocations trategy The configuration file for the media file system is displayed You can verify media file system parameters by viewing this file Do not edit this file Click Accept A Please wait message box displays progress and a succeeded message confirms the process 1s complete 7 A message informs you that you must restart the media server however the restart at the end of the Configure K2 Server wizard suffices so you do not need to restart now 8 Close the Storage Utility 9 Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server Part 2 Configuring the media server Part 2 1 Return to the Configu
255. irm that the iSCSI configuration is successful Close the Validation Report and then click Next Database Server Configuration S Database Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Clear media database Click this button to delete all information stored in the media is database Only perform this action if you have reinitialized the file system Erase media database Database configuration The media database is installed on this server Media database version fe 0 This Database Server fi 0 16 40 145 Redundant Database Server fi 0 16 40 146 Check the media database version lt Back Next gt Cancel Enter the name or IP address of K2 Media server B This is the redundant partner of the server you are now configuring Click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 123 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System On this page Do this Completing the Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Wait Configuration Wizard until all startup processes have completed before continuing If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes Configuring the redundant media server You must wait for the primary media server to restart before continuing To verify from the control point PC open the MS DOS command prompt and use the ping command For level 2 redundant after you have configured the first media server ser
256. is not required HE Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 A x m Network Configuration The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device You can modify the Rn IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the Modify button List ESLL _ MAC Address IPAddress Subnet J Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 3A C4 10 16 40 145 255 255 254 0 Port 1 No 00 11 43 35 34 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt Back Next gt Cancel The top port is the port over which the K2 System Configuration application is communicating with the media server If correctly configured it is already assigned the control network IP address as displayed on this page Select the other port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Server Configuration HS File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch Storage Utility Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure the storage system and file system Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 File system server 2 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Do not yet click Next Do not yet enter anything in the File System Server 2
257. is procedure 2 For redundant systems that use RAID 1 LUNs you must now create the separate RAID 1 storage for metadata files and journal files To bind unbound disks for metadata and journal storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for the controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu If the RAID chassis has two controllers both controllers are represented by the single Controller node The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list 116 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID Bind LUN 5 x LUM Type RAID 1 M Full Bind Selected Disks Disk as Disk m Avallable Disks Flash the drive lights Identity b In the LUN TYPE drop down box select RAID 1 NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it c In the Available Disks box select two contiguous disks at the top of the list These should be the first two disks in the primary RAID chassis TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks This creates a RAID 1 LUN for metadata storage d Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begi
258. is section when doing configuration or service work on the media file system or the media database of an existing K2 Storage System Procedures are as follows e Checking the media file system on page 285 e Cleaning unreferenced files and movies on page 285 e Making a new media file system on page 286 e Expanding the media file system by capacity on page 288 e Expanding the media file system by bandwidth on page 288 Checking the media file system This procedure checks the media file system but retains current media files The requirements for this procedure are as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be offline NOTE This procedure can take 20 hours or more ona large storage system Do not start this process unless you have adequate time set aside To check the media file system do the following 1 Click Tools Check File System 2 A message box appears Checking media file system Please wait Observe progress If problems are discovered they are reported If the check process passes when the process 1s complete a message appears to confirm success 3 Click OK to dismiss the results Your file system has been checked Cleanin
259. ject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this publication Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 or in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 U S A Rev Date Description November 23 2005 Initial release of the K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 071 8461 00 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Contents Safely SUIIT UI LOS ec esos passes tees a deat eee eisai 9 Salety rerms and Symbols kerat E E EO 10 DEVICE Salely SUMMA Yesa T 11 Certifications and Compliance S esnai e e E ETEN EE 11 Finding IMTONMAUO Mo sche Seacecezoeicceenessebiocsanse ase bestbecsewoayloncapescdihestdeondbareot 15 Getting more information cccccceccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeaeeeeeeeeeesseaaeeeseeeceeeeeeseeeaaaas 16 Using the Dell Server documentation cccccccccecceeeeeesseeceeceeeeeseseseeaeaeeeeeeeeeeess 18 Grass Valley Produ
260. k This is because all streaming traffic goes directly to the shared storage e On the K2 Media Client the four GigE ports are configured as two teams On external storage models one team is for the control network and one team is for the media SCSI network Each team shares a single IP address This provides redundancy Do not attempt to un team these ports Use the following procedures as necessary to implement your networking strategies NOTE Media network iSCSI IP addresses and Streaming network IP addresses are assigned using the K2 System Configuration application Networking tips Establish a consistent convention for machine names and IP addresses It is recommended that you embed a root name or other unique identifier for this particular K2 Storage System in the computer name Also a common convention for IP addresses is to use a numerical pattern or sequence in the IP addresses to indicate device types and or ports as in the following example NOTE This example assumes a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 37 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Example of Level 1 names and IP addresses Computer Device type Streaming network Control network Media network Comments name addresses addresses addresses root_raid_1 Level 1 RAID 192 168 101 11 192 168 100 11 192 168 99 11 192 168 99 12 root_gige_1 GigE switch 192 168 100 61
261. k dentify Disks This causes the disk drive LED to flash 4 Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process 294 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Loading RAID controller microcode 5 Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window 6 Restart the K2 Media Server Loading RAID controller microcode You might be instructed in K2 release notes to upgrade the RAID Controller microcode on the RAID chassis This allows you to take advantage of the RAID enhancements and benefit from improved reliability To upgrade RAID Controller microcode do the following 1 In Storage Utility right click a controller in the tree view then select Advanced Load Controller Microcode Redundant controllers that share the same set of disks are automatically selected and upgraded as a pair The Open File dialog box appears A Open File IO Coroatile micracade E a E O4FHO4Vil O4FHO4VF O4FHO4VH D4FHOPILBIN O4FHO4 BIN H w E O4FHT4ve MAFRISSSF MAPZSSAF ST3146r07FC ST3300007FC 0003 bin 0003 bir 5T373207FC DK Cancel 2 In the Open File dialog box browse to the latest controller microcode file for your controller select the file and click OK 3 The Progress Report window appears showing the microcode upgrade task and the percentage completion 4
262. l Contents 6 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Sene COMI aM Ol scicecucenonaeincsicecuntmacne a saueecadendaucnsautansne asi anlenGursieahas 237 SOFA Ss EMT AEE ati A tacts T E E E E ET E ETT 237 ei ai E E E E E EEE PA T E A ATE E SS 238 Managing K2 software ADOULKZ SONWALE niena a a 241 Software Components installed 2 0 ceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeaeeseeeeeceeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeeeess 242 Installing Control Point software lt t cconie oe eel ae ee ad 242 Hstaling K2 SOMWANG tc eae tise e e E dataantuatelahedecinaedae 243 Re installing Grass Valley SOfWALEC ccccccceccssssseeeeeeesaeseeeeeeeseaseeeeeesaaaeeeeess 243 Pre installed SOPWANIEC ccccccccccssseecesseecececeececseucecseueeceaaeessaeeessueeessueeessueeessaeees 244 K2 Media Client pre installed software cccccccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeas 244 K2 Media Server pre installed software ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaeeees 245 Grass Valley Control Point PC pre installed software ccceccecseeeeeeeeeeseaeeeees 246 BACKUP aNGiTECOVElY strategis escrocs n EA E EREE 246 Creating a recovery disk image for storing on E cccceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 248 Creating a recovery disk image CD S t ccccccccceccssessseeeeeceeeeeseeeeaeesaeeeeeeeeeees 249 Restoring from a recovery disk image on E ccccssseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeesueeeeesaaeees 250 Rest
263. l the above software pre installed at the factory When you receive the PC it is ready to install on the K2 Storage System control network and begin using with minimal configuration You can also build your own control point PC by installing and configuring software on an existing PC Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software for instructions Control point PC system requirements If you are building your own control point PC the machine you chose must meet the following requirements These requirements assume that the PC is dedicated to its function as the control point for the K2 Storage System and that no other applications run on the PC that could interfere with system performance Control point PC system requirements are as follows e Microsoft Windows XP Professional 400 MB hard disk space Service Pack 2 e Minimum 512 MB RAM 1 GB e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 recommended e Graphics acceleration with at least e Java JRE 1 3 1_12 and 1 4 2_05 128 MB memory This is required for the HP Ethernet e Pentium 4 or higher class processor 2 Switch configuration interface GHz or greater K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 K2 Ethernet switch description K2 Ethernet switch description The K2 Ethernet switch provides the primary network fabric of the K2 Storage System The switch supports Gigabit Ethernet connections which provides the bandwidth required for the iSCSI media traffic ase CCE teScolecssc
264. l Bind Selected Disks Disk as Disk m Avallable Disks Flash the drive lights Identity b In the LUN TYPE drop down box select RAID 1 NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it c In the Available Disks box select two contiguous disks at the top of the list These should be the first two disks in the primary RAID chassis TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks This creates a RAID 1 LUN for metadata storage d Click the add arrow button to add disks to the Selected Disks list NOTE As an aid in identifying a disk module s physical location select it in the Selected Disks list then click dentify Disks This causes the disk drive light to flash e Click OK to close the Binding LUN dialog box and begin the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process f Close the Progress Report and repeat the previous steps selecting two more contiguous disks to create another RAID 1 LUN for journal storage These should be the next two disks in the primary RAID chassis g Make the fifth disk in the primary RAID chassis a Hot Spare In the LUN TYPE drop down box select Hot Spare h In the Available Disks box select the fifth disk in the primary RAID chassis 1 Click the add arrow button to add the disk to the Selected Disks list j Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the binding process 3 To bind unbound
265. l three RAID chassis address is fixed at 0 so no configuration is required However if you have any L3 RAID Expansion chassis you must set their chassis addresses as shown in the following illustration Also verify that the diagnostic ID switches are in the position shown 142 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the L3 RAID chassis On each L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed set the same chassis address on both Expansion adapters These Expansion Chassis connected to DL1 These Expansion Chassis connected to DLO SIS T e O oa ITS f jh o VF ke ool Si L 0 A a ye
266. lication Click Next 42 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the LI RAID storage device Part 1 On this page Do this Page 3 HE New K2 system Page 3 You have defined a K2 system with the following information Name 10 16 40 145 Configuration Level x ecx K2 system Number of servers x Number of switches x Number of clients x When you click Finish a tree view will be created showing the devices on your K2 system Click the Configure button to configure each device All servers must be configured before any clients lt Back Cancel Review the information on this page and verify that you have correctly defined your K2 Storage System For a level 1 storage system you should have the following e One Gigabit Ethernet switch One K2 Media Server this is the L1 RAID Storage device The number and type of clients appropriate for your system Click Finish The Define New K2 Storage System wizard closes Your K2 Storage System appears in the tree view of the K2 System Configuration application Continue with the next procedure Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 1 Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 1 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select PrimaryK2Server Prirnan2 Server NOTE The Level I RAID Storage device is represented as a K2 Media Server in the K2 System Configuration applica
267. lications The manual contains information for level 1 level 2 and level 3 K2 Storage Systems in both redundant and non redundant configurations Refer to the sections that apply to the level of your K2 Storage System For custom K2 Storage Systems that do not fit one of these pre defined levels you must work with your Grass Valley representative for installation and operation This manual does not provide the complete information for devices that function as clients to the K2 Storage System For information on client devices refer to other documentation as follows e For NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide e For K2 Media Clients refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide How this manual is organized This manual is organized around the tasks required to install configure and operate the K2 Storage System The following describes the chapters included in this manual Chapter 1 Product Description Provides the product functional description and an overview of the key features Chapter 2 to Chapter 6 These chapters provide procedures for installing configuring and operating the different levels of the K2 Storage System as follows e Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System e Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System e Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System e Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System e Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Chapter 7
268. lient 192 168 100 111 192 168 99 111 root_client_2 iSCSI client 192 168 100 121 192 168 99 121 root_client_3 iSCSI client 192 168 100 131 192 168 99 131 root_client_4 iSCSI client 192 168 100 141 192 168 99 141 This IP address must resolve to hostname root_server_1_he0 Setting up host tables The hosts file is used by the network to determine the IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name hostname is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts on Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server operating system computers If you include the names and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other K2 devices instead of editing the hosts file on each K2 device Add the _he0 suffix to hostnames associated with FTP Streaming ports Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for more information If transferring to or from a Profile XP or Open SAN system via UIM the hosts file must also follow UIM naming conventions for those systems Refer to the UIM Instruction Manual To edit the hosts file manually 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts 70 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 2 Testing the control network Enter all IP addresses with machine names The text format is simple Fi
269. lighter Expansion chassis 41 kg 90 4 pounds or lighter Power consumption 530 W or below Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC 10 x2 50 60 Hz Ambient temperature Operating 5 C to 40 C Halting 10 C to 60 C Relative humidity without condensation Operating 10 to 80 Halting 10 to 80 Wet bulb temperature Operating 0 C to 27 C Halting 8 C to 29 C Allowable vibration level Operating 0 25 G Halting 0 5 G Labeling according to the Class G energy saving law Energy consumption efficiency 0 20 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 231 Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices K2 Level 3 RAID storage description The K2 Level 3 RAID Storage is used in Level 3 and Level 3R K2 Storage Systems The RAID storage device is a high performance high availability mass storage system The L3 RAID chassis 2Gb s host interface supports industry standard Fibre Channel technology L3 RAID Expansion Chassis O O O g O O O00 OO o Q20 f FA o HOr S S a eee 2 00 K SRKESM O oo O o OO000O y L3 RAID Chassis Four FC host ports are available so that the L3 RAID chassis can be connected directly to up to four media servers without Fibre Channel switches The L3 RAID chassis utilizes dual FC AL technology allowing four loop configurations within a single chassis Port BypassCircuits have been added to maintain loop integrity during failure
270. line cccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 269 Bringing a K2 Storage Systeri online nasia a a 269 Managing redundancy on a K2 Storage SYStEM ccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaaes 270 Identifying current primary backup K2 Media ServelrS cccccccssseececeeeesseeeees 270 Triggering an intentional failover cccccccsseeeeeceseeeeceseeeeeecseceeeesseaeeeeseneeeeesanes 272 Working with K2 Media Servers c cccccsssseseseeeeceeeeeeeeeaeaeeesceeeeeeeeeseesuaeaeeeeeeeeeeeess 274 Accessing K2 Media Server features cccccceeeceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesssaaseeeeeees 274 Taking a K2 Media Server out of service cc cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeas 274 Placing a K2 Media Server in SCrViCe cccceeseeeceececceeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssaeaaaeeees 275 Shutting down or restarting a K2 Media Servel cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 276 Identifying K2 Media Server software versions ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 276 Modifying K2 Media Server network settings cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 Replacing an iSCSI interface adapter TOE Card cccccccceesesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeess 277 Recovering from a failed K2 Media Server system battery cccceeeeseseeeeeees 278 Working with K2 Media Clients ini dccse esece cee seoretests bei cnccensees decleesetaucorescets wopeedees et 279 Accessing K2 Medi
271. ller chassis is prior to or simultaneous with the power off of its connected expansion chassis Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk drives to spin down before proceeding 5 Power off all Ethernet switches 6 Power off the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC if necessary Level 3 power on procedure Use the following steps to power on the level 3 storage system Device Verification instructions Power on the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC After log on start NetCentral NetCentral reports devices as offline As each device is powered on check NetCentral to verify the device s status Power on the Ethernet switch This description is for the HP ProCurve switch For the Cisco Catalyst switch refer to the documentation you received with the switch The switch performs its diagnostic self test which takes approximately 50 seconds to complete LED Behavior during the self test is as follows e Initially all the status LED Mode and port LEDs are on for most of the duration of the test e Most of the LEDs go off and then may come on again during phases of the self test For the duration of the self test the Test LED stays on When the self test completes successfully the Power and Fan Status LEDs remain on the Fault and Test LEDs go off and the port LEDs on the front of the switch go into their normal operational mode which is as follows e If the ports are con
272. m Instruction Manual November 23 2005
273. mage file Click Next The Comment page opens 10 If desired enter image comments such as the date time and software versions contained on the image you are creating Click Next The ready to proceed page opens 11 Remove the Recovery CD and insert a blank CD 12 Verify that you are creating an image from Disk and writing to the CD RW Drive F Click Proceed The Commit Pending Operations page opens and displays progress 13 Remove and insert CDs as prompted As you remove each burned CD make sure you label it correctly to show the sequence of CDs 14 When a The image was successfully created message appears click OK 15 Exit the Acronis True Image program The K2 Media Server restarts automatically 16 Remove any CD that is still in the CD drive while the K2 Media Server is shutting down Restoring from a recovery disk image on E The following procedure can be used on a K2 Media Server that needs its image restored 1 Make sure that media access is stopped and that the K2 Media Server on which you 250 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Restoring from a recovery disk image on E are working is out of service 2 If you have not already done so connect keyboard monitor and mouse to the K2 Media Server 3 Insert the Recovery CD and restart the machine If there is a problem restarting hold the standby button down for five seconds to force a hard shutdown Th
274. mary K2 Media Server click Stop This takes the server out of service Shut down the primary K2 Media Server if it does not shut down automatically Oo N A Aa A Power off the RAID controller chassis If expansion chassis are connected make sure the power off of the controller chassis is prior to or simultaneous with the power off of its connected expansion chassis Wait approximately 30 seconds for 128 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Level 2R power on procedure the disk drives to spin down before proceeding 9 Power off all Ethernet switches 10 Power off the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC if necessary Level 2R power on procedure Use the following steps to power on the level 2R storage system Device Verification instructions Power on the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC After log on start NetCentral NetCentral reports devices as offline As each device is powered on check NetCentral to verify the device s status Power on the Ethernet switches This description is for the HP ProCurve switch For the Cisco Catalyst switch refer to the documentation you received with the switch The switch performs its diagnostic self test which takes approximately 50 seconds to complete LED Behavior during the self test is as follows e Initially all the status LED Mode and port LEDs are on for most of the duration of the test e Mos
275. me as explained in the following options then proceed with the next step e If you decide to use a unique SNMP community name not public add the community and set its RW permissions For example if the community name is K2 type the following snmp server community K2 unrestricted e If you decide to use the default SNMP community public for NetCentral monitoring which already has RW permissions set as required by NetCentral proceed to the next step 9 Enter the SNMP community and IP address of the NetCentral server PC For example if the IP address is 192 168 40 11 and the community is public you type the following snmp server host public 192 168 40 11 10 Enable Authentication traps by typing the following snmp server enable traps authentication This allows NetCentral to test the switch to verify that it can send its SNMP trap messages to NetCentral 11 Type menu to get to menu mode November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 29 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System 12 If you need trunks to gang switches together using 1 Gig connections do the following Note This is not required if you use the 10 Gig ISL connections Select Switch Configuration o S Choose selection 2 Port Trunk Settings Press the right arrow key to choose Edit then press Enter Q OO Down arrow until at the bottom of the list of ports Right arrow over t
276. media server however the restart at the end of the Configure K2 Server wizard suffices so you do not need to restart now 6 Close the Storage Utility 7 Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server Part 2 Configuring the media server Part 2 1 Return to the Configure K2 Server page from which you launched Storage Utility and proceed as described in the following table 162 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 2 On this page Do this File System Server Configuration This page checks on the configuration of the media server in one of its main roles as a file system server The media server also functions as a file system client which is also checked from this page HS File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 E x M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure Launch Storage Utility the storage system and file system m M Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 fi 0 16 40 145 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration is correct click Next If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions relat
277. mounting the K2 Media Server e Important safety and regulatory information e K2 Media Server Status indicators messages and error codes e Troubleshooting help for the K2 Media Server hardware AN CAUTION Do not use the Dell Quick Installation Guide provided with the Dell CD ROM package This guide includes instructions for using the OpenManage software CD ROM to install an operating system The K2 Media Server comes fully configured and is ready for installation To begin installation refer to one of the installation chapters in this manual N m A Patr kig Stem Information Guide j ice ide Quick installation en ui conn e ere eas n co now ha yf cv gat gt ee aai se pre A Sa 18 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Grass Valley Product Support Grass Valley Product Support To get technical assistance check on the status of problems or report new problems contact Grass Valley Product Support via e mail the Web or by phone or fax Web Technical Support To access support information on the Web visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site You can download software or find solutions to problems by searching our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ database World Wide Web _http www thomsongrassvalley com support Technical Support E mail Address gvgtechsupport thomson net Phone Support Use the following information to contact product support by p
278. n special cases e Multi Path I O software You must install this software on K2 Media Clients that are part of a Level 2R or 3R K2 Storage System Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for more information November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Managing K2 software Software components installed Each of the K2 installation packages installs software components that provide the functionality for various applications and system tools Refer to Chapter 8 Overview of K2 Storage Tools and to the K2 Media Client System Guide for descriptions The components installed are as follows Software Components installed Comments K2 Client Core system software Provides the primary media functionality AppCenter user Allows you to operate AppCenter on the local machine interface AppServer Provides AppCenter functionality It is accessed by both the remote AppCenter on a Control Point PC and the local AppCenter user interface Storage Utility Configures the media storage on internal storage K2 Media Clients only Do not run Storage Utility on external storage K2 Media Clients K2 System Installed only on external storage models Provides to the Configuration remotely connected K2 System Configuration application the ability to configure the local machine You cannot run the K2 System Configuration user interface on the local K2 Media Client Multi Path I O Installation file
279. n the binding process The Progress Report dialog box opens showing the status of the binding process f Close the Progress Report and repeat the previous steps selecting two more contiguous disks to create another RAID 1 LUN for journal storage These should be the next two disks in the primary RAID chassis g Make the fifth disk in the primary RAID chassis a Hot Spare In the LUN TYPE drop down box select Hot Spare h In the Available Disks box select the fifth disk in the primary RAID chassis 1 Click the add arrow button to add the disk to the Selected Disks list j Click OK to close the dialog box and begin the binding process 3 To bind unbound disks for media storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu If the RAID chassis has two controllers both controllers are November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 117 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System represented by the single Controller node The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list Bind LUN 5 x LUN Type RAID 3 M Full Bind Aveallable Disks Flash the drive lights Identity NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it b In the LUN TYPE drop down box select RAID 3 c In the Available Disks box select five contiguous disks at the top of the list TIP Use
280. ndM ay mt a JournalSize pad a at Accept Cancel Edit a at Luotas ma ae mae ae Debug Allocations trategy The configuration file for the media file system is displayed You can verify media file system parameters by viewing this file Do not edit this file Click Accept A Please wait message box displays progress and a succeeded message confirms the process 1s complete 7 A message informs you that you must restart the media server however the restart at the end of the Configure K2 Server wizard suffices so you do not need to restart now 8 Close the Storage Utility 9 Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server 1A Part 2 Configuring the media server 1A Part 2 1 Return to the Configure K2 Server page from which you launched Storage Utility and proceed as described in the following table November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 205 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System 206 On this page Do this File System Server Configuration This page checks on the configuration of the media server in one of its main roles as a file system server The media server also functions as a file system client which is also checked from this page S File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to
281. nect cables as follows Media Ports 1 19 odd Ooms cleo Control Ports ISLs 2 20 even To the media ports on switch A make one media connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client and make two connections from media server A To the media ports on switch B make the second media connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client and make two connections from media server B To the control ports on switch A make one control connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client from media server A from the RAID storage chassis and from the control point PC To the control ports on switch B make the second control connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client and the control connection from media server B Interconnect switch A and switch B with two 10 Gig ISLs Refer to Level 2R system description on page 90 for a diagram of the complete system Refer to cabling procedures later in this chapter for the GigE connections at each of the devices of the K2 Storage System 92 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 2R redundant GigE switches Also refer to K2 Ethernet switch description on page 225 Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection For redundant systems with two switches do the following on each switch Use a direct console connection to the switch start a console session and access t
282. nected to active network devices the LEDs behave according to the LED Mode selected In the default view mode Link the LEDs should be on e If the ports are not connected to active network devices the LEDs will stay off If the LED display is different than what is described above especially if the Fault and Test LEDs stay on for more than 60 seconds or they start blinking the self test has not completed correctly Refer to the manual you received with the switch for troubleshooting information 168 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Using FTP for file transfer Device Verification instructions 3 Power on RAID storage devices Power on expansion chassis if present prior to or simultaneous with the power on for the main Fibre Channel chassis NOTE Always power on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to or simultaneously with the RAID Controller chassis Verify that start up indicators show normal start up processes as follows e DIR and SVP LEDs on the RAID controllers are blinking green e Disk Link LED is steady ON green e FLT and BAT LEDs are OFF e The front Power LED is ON Service LED is OFF after about 5 minutes Refer to the L3 RAID Instruction Manual to interpret other disk access LED or status LED behavior 4 Power on the K2 Media Server that is the media file system database server Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD displ
283. nel Contact your Grass Valley representative for assistance 288 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 November 23 2005 Working with RAID storage Working with RAID storage Use the procedures in this section when doing configuration or service work on the RAID storage devices of an existing K2 Storage System Procedures are as follows e Checking RAID storage subsystem status on page 289 e Checking controller microcode on page 290 e Identifying disks on page 290 e Get controller logs on page 291 e Unbind LUN on page 291 e Binding LUNs on page 292 e Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 e Loading RAID controller microcode on page 295 e Downloading disk drive firmware on page 295 e Replacing a disk module on page 296 e Replacing a controller on page 297 e Configuring Level 2 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings on page 298 e Configuring Level 3 RAID chassis network and SNMP settings on page 299 Checking RAID storage subsystem status Some limited status information for storage subsystems is displayed in the Storage Utility This can be helpful when configuring storage You can view status information by selecting items in the tree view Item in tree view Status information displayed Controllers in Device Number of Controllers Peer Status Primary IP Serial Number Slot Peer Slot Microcode Version
284. net Switch K2 Media Server K2 Media Client Ethernet Switch Generic iSCSI Client Ethernet Switch Fibre Channel Switch lt Remove K2 Media Client K2 Media Client K2 Media Client K2 Media Client lt Back Next gt Cancel Move clients into the Number of Devices box as appropriate for your system You cannot change the number of K2 Media Servers or Ethernet Switches as these are pre configured based on the level you selected in the previous page Click Next 110 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 1 On this page Do this Page 3 New K2 system Page 3 E x You have defined a K2 system with the following information Name 10 16 40 145 Configuration Level X eceu K2 system Number of servers x Number of switches x Number of clients x When you click Finish a tree view will be created showing the devices on your K2 system Click the Configure button to configure each device All servers must be configured before any clients lt Back Cancel Review the information on this page and verify that you have correctly defined your K2 Storage System For a level 2R storage system you should have the following e Two Gigabit Ethernet switches e Two K2 Media Servers e The number and type of clients appropriate for your system Click Finish The Define New K2 Storage System wizard closes Your K2 Storage Sy
285. ng level 2R devices on page 91 e Networking for level 2R on page 104 e Configuring the level 2R storage system on page 108 e Adding K2 Storage System clients on page 127 e Basic operations for level 2R storage on page 128 Work through these topics sequentially to install the storage system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 89 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Level 2R system description Multiple iSCSI clients O1 UOD epon 01 U00 epaw 01 U0D BIPII O4 U0D eIps 041UOD EIp N 041U0D EIp N f _ l S Gigabit Ethernet Control Ge es A switches Control point PC __ Jouo9 epon epa m K2 media Servers Fibre Channel connections L2R RAID chassis K Chassis optionan The level two redundant level 2R storage system has two Gigabit Ethernet switches connected by Inter Switch Links ISLs to support a redundant Ethernet fabric The storage system also has redundant K2 media servers The media servers are configured to have identical roles This provides redundancy for database file system and FTP roles One L2 RAID supports redundant Fibre Channel connections An Expansion chassis is optional for increased storage capacity K2 Media Clients have a pair of redundant teamed
286. nt connects to the K2 Storage System with a redundant Ethernet fabric such as in Levels 2R and 3R install Multi path I O software For more information refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral As you configure the K2 Storage System information is automatically sent to NetCentral When NetCentral receives the information it adds devices and populates its interface with a view of the K2 Storage System Before you begin using the K2 System Configuration application to configure the storage system you must set up the NetCentral system according to the following requirements e NetCentral installed NetCentral server software must be installed on a NetCentral server PC This can be the K2 configuration control point PC or another PC that has network communication with the K2 Storage System control network e Device providers installed A device provider must be installed on the NetCentral server PC for each type of device in the K2 Storage System For a level 3R storage system the following device providers must be installed e Control point PC device provider This is the Windows monitoring device provider e K2 Media Server device provider e HP Gigabit Switch device provider or Cisco Gigabit Switch device provider e K2 Media Client device provider if any K2 Media Clients are accessing the level 3R storage system e Device provider for iSCSI clients if any iSCSI clients such as News
287. o teams On external storage models one team is for the control network and one team is for the media SCSI network Each team shares a single IP address This provides redundancy Do not attempt to un team these ports Use the following procedures as necessary to implement your networking strategies November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 69 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System NOTE Media network iSCSI IP addresses and Streaming network IP addresses are assigned using the K2 System Configuration application Networking tips Establish a consistent convention for machine names and IP addresses It is recommended that you embed a root name or other unique identifier for this particular K2 Storage System in the computer name Also a common convention for IP addresses is to use a numerical pattern or sequence in the IP addresses to indicate device types and or ports as in the following example NOTE This example assumes a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Example of Level 2 names and IP addresses Computer Device type Streaming network Control network Media network Comments name addresses addresses addresses root_server_ 1 Media server 192 168 101 112 192 168 100 11 192 168 99 11 192 168 99 12 root_raid_1 RAID 192 168 100 51 root_gige_1 GigE switch 192 168 100 61 root_cppc_1 Control point 192 168 100 8 1 PC root_client_1 iSCSI c
288. o the Group column mh Use the Space bar and set the bottom port to Trk1 Set the next port up also to Trk1 gt ga Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 9 Choose Reboot Switch to restart the switch 10 You can now use the switch s web browser interface for further configuration as instructed in the next procedure 11 Close the PC terminal program and disconnect the console cable Continue with the next procedure Configuring the GigE switch VLANs Configuring the GigE switch VLANs The following steps are for the HP ProCurve switch Accomplish tasks similarly ona Cisco switch 1 From the control point PC or another PC make sure that you have a direct Ethernet cable connection to the switch with no other switches or networking devices in between 2 On the PC open Internet Explorer and type the switch s IP address in the Address field as in the following example http 192 168 100 61 This should be the name or IP address as currently configured on the switch 3 Press Enter to open the switch s configuration application NOTE The configuration application for the HP ProCurve switch requires Java You can also access the switch s configuration application from the K2 System Configuration application 4 In the switch s configuration application choose Confi
289. oad firmware to a single disk by right clicking a disk icon in the tree view 2 In the Open File dialog box browse to the latest firmware file for your disks select the file and click 3 Click OK The Progress Report window appears showing the disk firmware download task and the percentage completion 4 When finished restart the RAID storage and the K2 Media Server Replacing a disk module In the event of a disk drive failure you ll repair the system by replacing the disk module as soon as possible Refer to the Instruction Manual for your level of RAID storage chassis for information on removing and replacing disk modules NOTE Always use Storage Utility to physically identify the failed disk module Accidently removing the wrong disk module can destroy all media on the disk drives When the RAID controller detects that the disk module has failed it automatically disables the disk module This is reported in Storage Utility and you should verify that the disk module is disabled before removing it In some cases you might suspect that the disk module is going bad but the controller has not yet detected a failure and has therefore not yet disabled the drive In this case you should manually disable the disk module before you remove it This avoids momentary interruptions in signal output that can occur The disabled state is 296 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Replacing a controller persist
290. ommunication takes place on the FTP Streaming network and not on the Command Control network The following section describes the supported FTP commands FTP commands supported The following table lists the FTP commands that the K2 FTP server supports name description CWD Change working Supported directory CDUP Change to parent Supported directory 258 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 November 23 2005 About the K2 FTP interface Supported Reports size in number of fields Supported Reports size in Bytes K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 259 Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System 260 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Chapter 1 1 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Topics in this chapter include the following e Setting up application security on page 262 e Virus scanning and protection policies on page 262 e Synchronizing system clocks on page 264 e Modifying K2 Storage System settings on page 265 e Managing redundancy on a K2 Storage System on page 270 e Working with K2 Media Servers on page 274 e Working with K2 Media Clients on page 279 e Using Storage Utility on page 283 e Working on the media file system and database on page 285 e Working with RAID storage on page 289 e Working with Ethernet switches on page 301 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruct
291. on Adapter on the L2 RAID Expansion chassis requires a diagnostic cable which must be connected Install Ethernet and diagnostic cabling as shown Diagnostic cables L2 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed L2 RAID Chassis Connect to a Y control port ST e 1 Eea aa Ethernet Switch Ethernet cable Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis Every chassis must have a chassis address The level two RAID chassis address is fixed at 0 so no configuration is required However if you have a L2 RAID Expansion chassis you must set its chassis address to as shown in the following illustration Also verify that the diagnostic ID switches are in the position shown 100 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 November 23 2005 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis Set the chassis address to 1 on both L2 RAID Expansion adapters Chassis ID 0 Address 1 h HP gt OX ER
292. on Manual 245 Chapter 9 Managing K2 software SQL XML 3 0 80 1529 1 StorNext File System 2 5 2b56 SanSurfer Control 1X 1 0 0 0 Windows Server 2003 SP1 Updates KB896428 KB883939 KB890046 KB896358 KB896422 KB898715 KB901214 KB903235 Grass Valley Control Point PC pre installed software Broadcom Gigabit Integrated Controller Conexant D850 V 9x DFVc Modem Dell Resource CD HighMAT Extension to WinXP CD Writing Wizard NET Framework 1 1 NET Framework 1 1 Hotfix MS XML 4 0 Parser amp SDK TrendMicro OfficeScan Client Windows Installer 3 1 Windows Media Connect Backup and recovery strategies K2 Storage System Instruction Manual On the Level 1 RAID Storage device and on the K2 Media Server there are three partitions on the system drive to support backup and recovery strategies as follows e The C drive is for the Windows operating system and applications e The D drive is for the media file system SNES and the media database SQL This allows you to restore the Windows operating system on the C drive yet keep the files on the D drive intact You can also restore the D drive itself however your backup and recovery strategy is different for non redundant and redundant systems as follows e On non redundant servers levels 1 2 and 3 the media file system program metadata and journal files are on the D drive Also the media database program and data files are on the D drive Therefore if
293. onnel Contact your Grass Valley representative for assistance If you need to increase the storage capacity of your K2 Storage System you can do so by adding one or more Expansion Chassis up to the maximum number of chassis allowed for your level of storage When expanding by capacity you must add enough storage to support the entire bandwidth load of the system For example if the current system requires six LUNs to support its bandwidth specification then you must add another six LUNs to expand the system s storage capacity When you add an Expansion Chassis to increase storage capacity use the following procedure 1 Install and cable the Expansion Chassis 2 Bind the LUNs in the Expansions Chassis using Background Bind 3 When binding is complete put the K2 Storage System in an offline state as follows e You must access Storage Utility via the K2 System Configuration application login with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e When you access Storage Utility the K2 Storage System must be offline e All iSCSI clients and K2 Media Clients in the K2 Storage System must be shut down 4 Restart the K2 Media Server 5 In Storage Utility select Tools Expand File System By Capacity 6 A message box reports progress When a message reports success the process 1s complete Expanding the media file system by bandwidth This procedure should only be attempted by qualified Grass Valley support person
294. ontrol point PC and the NetCentral server PC are the same PC or are different PCs you must still add the control point PC to NetCentral In addition NetCentral automatically changes its view of the K2 Storage System whenever you use the K2 System Configuration application to do one of the following e Remove a K2 Storage System e Rename a K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 103 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System e Add a device to a K2 Storage System e Remove a device from a K2 Storage System Refer to the NetCentral User Guide to set up the NetCentral system After installing a device provider you can find additional documentation about monitoring that type of device on the NetCentral Help menu Networking for level 2R Use the topics in this section to configure the Gigabit Ethernet GigE network for the level 2R storage system Networking requirements on page 104 Networking tips on page 105 Setting up host tables on page 105 Testing the control network on page 106 Networking requirements Required networking strategies for a K2 Storage System are as follows Three networks e Media network Exclusively for iSCSI traffic Streaming network For media transfers and FTP traffic Control network For all other non streaming non iSCSI traffic Networks must be on separate subnets The media SCSI network is 100 physically
295. oring from a recovery disk image CD Se t ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 252 FTP on the K2 Storage System ADo tnNetworks and FTP seriei ae e a 255 Sample network configuration and hosts file cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 About the K2 FTP interface 2 cic 85 2205 ode ndbadesndeacs ten deasateniaaleusaudeoneesaaicandecioaatvelectousesee 257 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Setting UP APPliCAtION SECULILY eisereen eT E Eei ta E ELERE RSN 262 Virus scanning and protection policies ccccesceccceseeeececeeeceeceeseeecseeeeeeseeneeeessaaes 262 POMS USEC Dy K2 Servicos zanne a e a a ates 264 SYVMCAFOMIZING SYSTEM CIOCKS onen A a a A et al al 264 Modifying K2 Storage System settings ccccccccccsseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 265 Accessing K2 Storage System feature ccccesseeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaas 265 Renaming a K2 Storage System cccccccccecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesesaaaas 265 Adding devices to a K2 Storage System cccccccesseseeeeececeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 265 Removing a K2 Storage System cccccccccesceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesesaeaeeeeseeeeseeeeeesesseaas 267 Accessing a K2 Storage System from multiple PCS ccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 268 Reconnecting to a K2 Storage System ccccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesesaaaas 269 Taking a K2 Storage System off
296. ority on the tasks necessary to start the LUN binding process then catch up with other tasks while the LUNs are binding Also refer to K2 Level 3 RAID storage description on page 232 140 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the L3 RAID chassis Assign Fibre Channel address ID Every RAID controller must have a unique Fibre Channel address ID that identifies the controller on the Fibre Channel fabric On the L3 RAID you do not need to manually set the Fibre Channel address ID as it is pre set at the factory Connect the L3 RAID chassis Connect Fibre Channel cabling 7th L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed 5th L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed 3rd L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed 1St L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed Connect Expansion Chassis in order alternating between DL1 and DLO These Expansion Chassis connected to DL1 These Expansion Chassis connected to DLO 9 Oo IIS 000 IIS 6th L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed 4th L3 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed
297. ose the entire RAID protected system drive you can use your disk image recovery CDs to restore the system NOTE Recovery disk images do not back up the media files themselves You must implement other mechanisms such as a redundant storage system or mirrored storage systems to back up media files November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 247 Chapter 9 Managing K2 software The recommended recovery disk image process is summarized in the following steps At the K2 Media Server first birthday 1 Boot from the Recovery CD 2 Create a set of disk image recovery CDs These CDs contain the C D and E partitions 3 Create a disk image writing the disk image to the E partition This disk image contains the C and D partitions 4 Copy the disk image from the E partition to another location such as a network drive At milestones such as after software upgrades 1 Boot from the Recovery CD 2 Create a disk image writing the disk image to the E partition This disk image contains the C and D partitions 3 Copy the disk image from the E partition to another location such as a network drive If you need to restore the K2 Media Server 1 Boot from the Recovery CD 2 If the E partition is accessible read the image from the E partition to restore the C partition restore the D partition or restore both partitions 3 If the E partition is not accessible do the following a R
298. ou must set up the NetCentral system according to the following requirements e NetCentral installed NetCentral server software must be installed on a NetCentral server PC This can be the K2 configuration control point PC or another PC that has network communication with the K2 Storage System control network e Device providers installed A device provider must be installed on the NetCentral server PC for each type of device in the K2 Storage System For a level 1 storage system the following device providers must be installed e Control point PC device provider This is the Windows monitoring device provider e K2 Level 1 RAID storage device provider e HP Gigabit Switch device provider or Cisco Gigabit Switch device provider e K2 Media Client device provider if any K2 Media Clients are accessing the level 1 storage system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 35 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System e Device provider for iSCSI clients if any iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are accessing the level 1 storage system e Grass Valley PC Monitoring software installed This software must be installed on the K2 configuration control point PC It includes Grass Valley SNMP agents and other WMI based components to perform process monitoring This provides the information for some of the SNMP trap messages that must be sent to NetCentral Control point PC monitored by NetCentral The K2 confi
299. ow use the switch s web browser interface for further configuration as instructed in the next procedure 11 Close the PC terminal program and disconnect the console cable Continue with the next procedure Configuring the GigE switch VLANs Configuring the GigE switch VLANs The following steps are for the HP ProCurve switch Accomplish tasks similarly on a Cisco switch 1 From the control point PC or another PC make sure that you have a direct Ethernet cable connection to the switch with no other switches or networking devices in between 2 On the PC open Internet Explorer and type the switch s IP address in the Address field as in the following example 58 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 2 GigE switch httpo 192 168 100 61 This should be the name or IP address as currently configured on the switch 3 Press Enter to open the switch s configuration application NOTE The configuration application for the HP ProCurve switch requires Java You can also access the switch s configuration application from the K2 System Configuration application 4 In the switch s configuration application choose Configuration then Port Configuration sw Status Non Critical HP J4905A ProCurve Switch 3400cl 24G identity Stats Configuration SeCHTITY Diagnostics Suppor Device View _Fault Detection System Info _IP Configuration a Monitor Port Device Features
300. owing cabling requirements of the level 2 storage devices e Each L2 RAID chassis has a single connection to the Ethernet fabric through its LAN card e The Expansion Adapter on the L2 RAID Expansion chassis requires a diagnostic November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 63 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System cable which must be connected Install Ethernet and diagnostic cabling as shown Diagnostic cable L2 RAID Expansion Chassis if installed 000 yesh KO C Oomi L2 RAID Chassis Ethernet cable 7 w ihe control por J OE OS oF oO Ethernet Switch Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis Every chassis must have a chassis address The level two RAID chassis address is fixed at 0 so no configuration is required However if you have a L2 RAID Expansion chassis you must set its chassis address to as shown in the following illustration Also verify that the diagnostic ID switches are in the position shown 64 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 November 23 2005 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis Set
301. perly processed The port that needs to be open is port 445 for TCP and UDP for Windows and SAMBA shares If your site s policies require that these port numbers change contact Grass Valley support for assistance Access to the K2 system should be controlled in order to limit the likelihood of malicious or unintended introduction of viruses The front and rear USB ports of the K2 Media Client and K2 Media Servers should normally be disabled they should only be used by Windows administrators On a K2 Media Client be careful that you do not disable the internal USB connection to the RS 422 boards Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 263 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System Ports used by K2 services The following ports are used by the applications and system tools of the K2 family of products Port Type of Service name Description connection 49168 HTTP Grass Valley K2 System Configuration application connection 49169 TCP K2 Config between a control point PC and the K2 Storage System device configured Both HTTP and TCP connections are required Most functions use the HTTP connection but a few functions that require longer time periods use TCP 49170 HTTP Grass Valley Transfer Manager connection between source Transfer Queue Service system and destination system 49171 TCP Grass Valley AppCenter connection for connection between AppServic
302. ple First type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Then type the machine name Here is an example t92 L09991 1921683 L00 LI 19216810L an 192 166 210 025 1 t92 63400261 root raid 1 root raid 1 root raid 1 he0 root raid 1 root gige 1 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 38 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Testing the control network 4 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machines This is easier than editing the file on each machine Testing the control network To test the control network use the ping command as follows 1 On the control point PC click Start Run The Run dialog box opens 2 Type cmd and click OK The command prompt window opens 3 Type ping then a space then the name of one of your K2 Storage System devices such as the Gigabit Ethernet switch as in the following example ping root gige 1 4 Press Enter The ping command should return the IP address of the device as in the following example Pinging root gige 1 mycorp com 192 168 100 61 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 This verifies that the name of the device is being correctly resolved to the IP address which indicates that on the Cont
303. procedure Configuring the media server 1A Part 1 Configuring the media server 1A Part 1 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select PrimaryK2Server Prirnan2 Server Le 2 Click the Configure button Configure The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the media server for a level 3R K2 Storage November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 195 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System 196 System as described in the following table On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles A i x m Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure m Server roles G This server will be configured for the roles selected below V SNFS file system server IV iSCSI bridge Enter the IP address of the ethernet switch to which this server is connected IV Media database server O FTP server NAS server Enter the name or IP address for the media server as currently configured on the machine Enter the name or IP address of the Ethernet switch as currently configured on the switch to which the media server is connected For level 3 redundant server roles leave SNFS file system server iSCSI bridge and Media database server selected Click Next Software Configuration This page checks for the software re
304. ps within a single standard chassis are configured as a single loop with a backup loop in standby mode The L2 RAID chassis contains from fifteen half height 3 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL disk drives The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers in one 3U high rack mountable chassis 230 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 K2 Level 2 RAID specifications The L2 RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity The Expansion Chassis has one or two Expansion Adapters installed but has no LAN card Only one L2 RAID Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single L2 RAID chassis comprising a single disk array storage system with a total of 30 drives NOTE Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in a file system stripe group For servicing information on the L2 RAID storage system refer to the K2 Level 2 RAID Storage Instruction Manual K2 Level 2 RAID specifications The K2 Level 2 RAID chassis is a NEC S1300 model with specifications as follows Characteristic Specification Host interface Fibre Channel Data transfer rate 200 MB s max Number of host ports 2 ports 1 port controller Cache memory 1 GB 512 MB controller Cabinet dimensions 482 mm 19 W x 594 mm 23 4 D x 131 mm 5 2 S H same for basic chassis and expansion chassis Weight Basic chassis 45 kg 99 2 pounds or
305. put servers back into service when you power up the K2 Storage System is dependent on their primary backup roles at the time when you power down the K2 Storage System For the backup K2 Media Server click Stop This takes the server out of service Shut down the backup K2 Media Server if it does not shut down automatically For the primary K2 Media Server click Stop This takes the server out of service Shut down the primary K2 Media Server if it does not shut down automatically oO N A Aa A For your other two K2 Media Servers that are the FTP servers first shut down the 218 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 backup then the primary Level 3R power on procedure 9 Power off the RAID controller chassis If expansion chassis are connected make sure the power off of the controller chassis is prior to or simultaneous with the power off of its connected expansion chassis Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk drives to spin down before proceeding 10 Power off all Ethernet switches 11 Power off the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC if necessary Level 3R power on procedure Use the following steps to power on the level 3R storage system Device Verification instructions Power on the control point PC and or the NetCentral server PC After log on start NetCentral NetCentral reports devices as offline As each device is powered on check NetCentral to v
306. quired to support the roles you selected on the previous page HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 a x Installed software Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed Operating System Microsoft R Windows Ri Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Koon XOX software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DOK KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID On this page Do this Network Configuration This page displays the control network Ethernet port and allows you to configure the FTP Streaming network Ethernet port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports For Level 3R since this server does not take the role of FTP server configuring the second port here for the FTP streaming network
307. r a diagram of the complete system Refer to cabling procedures later in this chapter for the GigE connections at each of the devices of the K2 Storage System Also refer to K2 Ethernet switch description on page 225 Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection Use a direct console connection to the switch start a console session and access the Switch Setup screen to set the IP address The following procedure is for the HP ProCurve switch If you have a Cisco switch accomplish the same tasks as appropriate Consult the documentation that came with the switch for more information 1 Configure the PC terminal emulator on the control point PC or another PC as a DEC VT 100 ANSI terminal or use a VT 100 terminal and configure either one to operate with these settings e Baud rate 9600 e 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and flow control set to Xon Xoff e Also disable uncheck the Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows option 2 Connect the PC to the switch s Console Port using the console cable included with the switch 3 Turn on the PC s power and start the PC terminal program 4 Press Enter two or three times and you will see the copyright page and the message Press any key to continue Press a key and you will then see the switch console command CLI prompt 5 At the prompt enter setup to display the Switch Setup screen 6 Tab to the IP Config DHCP Bootp field and use the Sp
308. r iSCSI traffic Streaming network For media transfers and FTP traffic Control network For all other non streaming non iSCSI traffic e Networks must be on separate subnets e The media GSCSI network is 100 physically separate This separation is 36 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Networking tips provided by dedicated Gigabit ports cables and by VLANs on a single switch or by separate switches e The streaming network and the control network are also physically separated by dedicated ports and cables but the traffic can be mixed on the same VLAN or switch e Static IP addresses are required for the media network on K2 Storage System iSCSI devices This includes the iSCSI clients connected to the storage such as K2 Media Clients and NewsEdits and the Level 1 RAID device e Machine names host names assigned to each K2 device e Host tables hosts files provide name resolution for the media network on each K2 Media Client iSCSI client and Level 1 RAID e IP addresses for FTP streaming ports must have name resolution such that hostnames are appended with the _heO suffix You can use host tables as in Setting up host tables on page 38 or another mechanism to provide the name resolution This directs the streaming traffic to the correct port Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for a complete explanation e Only Level 1 RAID devices need to be on the streaming networ
309. r servicing information on the L1 RAID storage system refer to the K2 Level 1 RAID Storage Instruction Manual K2 Level 1 RAID specifications The K2 Level 1 RAID storage chassis uses the same chassis as the K2 Media Client with specifications as follows Characteristic Specification Host interface Gigabit Ethernet 2 ports on motherboard 1 port on iSCSI adapter Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition iSCSI Adapter One Qlogic SANblade 1 Gbps iSCSI TOE PCI X Host Bus Adapter Height 7 in 177 mm Width 17 75 in 450 mm 228 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 K2 Level 1 RAID specifications Characteristic Specification Depth 25 75 in 654 mm Weight Information not available Power supply Dual redundant Mains Input Voltage 100V to 240V auto range 50 60Hz Power consumption 300W typical 500W maximum Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Non Operating Ambient Temperature 10 to 40 C Operating Relative Humidity Operating 20 to 80 from 5 to 45 C Non Operating 10 to 80 from 30 to 60 C Do not operate with visible moisture on the circuit boards Operating Altitude To 10 000 feet IEC 950 compliant to 2000 meters Storage Altitude To 40 000 feet Non Operating Mechanical Shock Class 5 30G Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Random Vibration Operational Class 6 Thomson Grass Valley 0011315
310. ration of the level 3 storage system e Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 151 Defining a new K2 Storage System on page 152 Configuring the media server Part 1 on page 154 Configuring RAID on page 156 Creating a new file system on page 161 Configuring the media server Part 2 on page 162 Prerequisites for initial configuration Before beginning your initial configuration make sure the devices of the K2 Storage System meet the following prerequisites Refer to sections earlier in this manual for detailed information Also refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices Devices Prerequisite for level 3 configuration Control point PC Ethernet cable connected Control Point software installed Control network IP address assigned Network communication over the control network with all other K2 devices Power on Ethernet switch Ethernet cables connected Control network IP address assigned VLANS set up Power on K2 Media Server Ethernet cables connected Fibre Channel cable connected Software installed as from the factory Control network IP address assigned Power on L3 RAID chassis Fibre Channel address ID assigned to RAID controller s Fibre Channel cable s connected Ethernet cable s connected Power on L3 RAID Expansion chassis optional Chassis address assigned for Fibre Channel Fibre channel cable s conne
311. re K2 Server page from which you launched Storage Utility and proceed as described in the following table November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 121 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System 122 On this page Do this File System Server Configuration This page checks on the configuration of the media server in one of its main roles as a file system server The media server also functions as a file system client which is also checked from this page S File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure the storage system and file system Launch Storage Utility M Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 File system server 2 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Enter the name or IP address of the redundant media server server B Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration is correct click Next If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions related to this message later in the procedure K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 2 On this page Do this iSCS
312. rive while the K2 Media Server is shutting down Restoring from a recovery disk image CD set The following procedure can be used on a K2 Media Server that needs all three partitions on the system drive restored 1 Make sure that media access is stopped and that the K2 Media Server on which you are working is not being used 2 If you have not already done so connect keyboard monitor and mouse to the K2 Media Server 3 Insert the Recovery CD and restart the machine If there is a problem restarting hold the standby button down for five seconds to force a hard shutdown Then press the standby button again to startup The machine boots from the disc The Acronis True Image program loads 4 Insert the last CD volume in your recovery disk image CD set For example if there are three CDs that make up the disk image insert the third CD 5 In the Acronis True Image main window double click Restore Image The Restore Image Wizard opens 6 On the Welcome page click Next The Image Archive Selection page opens 7 In the tree view expand the node for the CD ROM drive and select the image file then click Next 252 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Restoring from a recovery disk image CD set The Verify Archive Before the Restoring page opens 8 Leave the selection at No don t want to verify and then click Next The Partition or Disk to Restore page opens 9 Select Disk 1 to select
313. rking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product DANGER high voltage Protective ground earth terminal ATTENTION refer to manual 10 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Service Safety Summary Service Safety Summary WARNING The service instructions in this manual are intended for A use by qualified service personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to all safety summaries before performing service Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or if provided the power switch Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power and remove battery if applicable before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections Certifications and Compliances Canadian Certified Power Cords Canadian approval includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in the North America power network All other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use FCC Emission Control
314. rmat is simple First type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Then type the machine name Here is an example LOZ LOOK root Server 3 OAc OOe aoe root server 3 1392168 OO a root server 3 D2 eG gs LOT root server 3 hed 192 163 L00 51 root raid 1 LOD L684 00 61 root gige 1 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 4 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machines This is easier than editing the file on each machine Testing the control network To test the control network use the ping command as follows 1 On the control point PC click Start Run The Run dialog box opens 2 Type cmd and click OK The command prompt window opens 3 Type ping then a space then the name of one of your K2 Storage System devices such as the Gigabit Ethernet switch as in the following example ping root gige 1 190 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Testing the control network 4 Press Enter The ping command should return the IP address of the device as in the following example Pinging root gige 1 mycorp com 192 168 100 61 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 This verifies that the name of the device is being correctly resolved to the IP ad
315. rol Point PC the host table entry is correct 5 Ping the other K2 Storage System devices to which you have assigned control network IP addresses 6 Go to each Windows device in the K2 Storage System and repeat this procedure This verifies that network communication is correct to and from all devices November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 39 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System 40 Configuring the level 1 storage system Use the topics in this section to do the initial configuration of the level 1 storage system e Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 40 e Defining anew K2 Storage System on page 41 e Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 1 on page 43 e Configuring RAID on page 45 e Creating a new file system on page 48 e Configuring the L1 RAID storage device Part 2 on page 49 Prerequisites for initial configuration Before beginning your initial configuration make sure the devices of the K2 Storage System meet the following prerequisites Refer to sections earlier in this manual for detailed information Also refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices Devices Prerequisite for level 1 configuration Control point PC Ethernet cable connected Control Point software installed Control network IP address assigned Network communication over the control network with all other K2 devices Power on Ethernet switc
316. rol point PC or otherwise lose the connection to a K2 Storage System from the K2 System Configuration application you can reconnect The requirements for reconnecting to a K2 Storage System from the K2 System Configuration application are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher To reconnect to a K2 Storage System select Retrieve Configuration and enter the name or IP address of the K2 Media Server for the K2 Storage System If the K2 Storage System has multiple K2 Media Servers you must enter the name or IP address of the server configured first which is designated as server 1 server A or server 1A depending on the level of the system The K2 Storage System appears in the tree view Taking a K2 Storage System offline To take a K2 Storage System offline do the following 1 Stop all media access 2 Take all K2 Media Clients and all iSCSI clients offline Refer to Taking all K2 Media Clients offline on page 280 3 Take all K2 Media Servers out of service If you have redundant servers make sure that you know and remember which server is the current primary and which server 1s the current backup and that you take primary backup servers out of service in the proper order Refer to Taking a K2 Media Server out of service on page 274 Bringing a K2 Storage System online To bring a K2 Storage System online do the following
317. rol point PC system requirements on page 224 Then all that is required is to install the Control Point software from the K2 System Software CD as referenced in the preceding section Installing K2 software Except as noted in the preceding sections when you receive your K2 Storage System you do not need to install software The system has the most recent software pre installed at the factory If you are upgrading software on a K2 Storage System refer to the K2 Storage System Release Notes or the K2 Media Client Release Notes for that version of software for specific software upgrade procedures Re installing Grass Valley software NOTE Follow these instructions if you need to re install software If you are upgrading to a new release version see the Release Notes for the latest information on installation procedures For more information on recovery procedures see Backup and recovery strategies on page 246 In most cases you can re install the same version of software by simply running the correct setup exe file from the K2 System Software CD ix Grass Valley Control Point 2 1 8 1 InstallShield Wizard Program Maintenance Modify repair or remove the program C Modify Change which program Features are installed This option displays the Custom Selection dialog in which you can change the way Features are installed Repair installation errors in the program This option Fixes missing or corrupt Files
318. rovide name resolution for the media network on each K2 Media Client iSCSI client and K2 Media Server IP addresses for FTP streaming ports must have name resolution such that hostnames are appended with the _heO suffix You can use host tables as in Setting up host tables on page 190 or another mechanism to provide the name resolution This directs the streaming traffic to the correct port Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for a complete explanation Only K2 Media Servers in the role of FTP server need to be on the streaming network This is because all streaming traffic goes directly to the shared storage November 23 2005 Networking tips e On the K2 Media Client the four GigE ports are configured as two teams On external storage models one team is for the control network and one team is for the media iSCSI network Each team shares a single IP address This provides redundancy Do not attempt to un team these ports Use the following procedures as necessary to implement your networking strategies NOTE Media network iSCSI IP addresses and Streaming network IP addresses are assigned using the K2 System Configuration application Networking tips Establish a consistent convention for machine names and IP addresses It is recommended that you embed a root name or other unique identifier for this particular K2 Storage System in the computer name Also a common convention for IP addresses is to use a
319. row to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 8 From the main menu choose Console Passwords and press Enter The Set Password Menu opens 9 Chose Set Manager Password and press Enter 10 Enter a password You can use the default K2 administrator password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 11 Return to the main menu 12 Tab to Command Line CLI and press Enter The command prompt appears 13 Type configure to change to configuration mode 14 You now configure an administrator username You can use the default K2 administrator username K2admin or your site s username for administering the K2 Storage System For example to set the username to K2admin type the following password manager user name K2admin 10 When prompted for the password enter a password You can use the default K2 password K2admin or your site s password for administering the K2 Storage System 15 Decide your SNMP community name as explained in the following options then proceed with the next step e If you decide to use a unique SNMP community name not public add the community and set its RW permissions For example if the community name is K2 type the following snmp server community K2 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 57 Chapter 3 Inst
320. rrent primary backup roles the K2 Media Server shuts down automatically If the server does not shut down automatically shut it down manually Then restart the server The server then starts up in an out of service state Placing a K2 Media Server in service This procedure applies to K2 Media Servers that are taking the role of media file system and database server When you put a K2 Media Server in service you start the failover service software This makes the K2 Media Server capable of taking the role of media file system and database server If a redundant K2 Media Server is currently in service as primary placing the backup K2 Media Server in service triggers the media database replication process in which the media database on the backup is synched up with the media database on the primary On K2 Storage Systems with redundant K2 Media Servers in the role of media file system and database server you must manually place the server in service whenever you power up or restart the server This is because the Failover Monitor service which must be running to qualify the server in the role of media file system and database server is set to manual start mode It does not start automatically This allows you to control server redundancy in the various shutdown powerup restart scenarios you might encounter between your two servers To place a K2 Media Server in service do the following 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tre
321. rs g rc a oes a cada seausihsbmd styler ia dud oat Lares ence ens 303 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Contents 8 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Safety Summaries General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Do Not Operate Without Covers To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Do Not operate in Wet Damp Conditions To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Avoid Exposed Circuitry To avoid
322. rst type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Then type the machine name Here is an example 192 16949911 root Server d LD Oi 29a A root Server Ll 1921689100711 FOOL Server 1 EIA OOO Lyk root server 1 hed 92 68410 OS root raid 1 T92 168 L00 61 root gige 1 Save the file and exit the text editor Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machines This is easier than editing the file on each machine Testing the control network To test the control network use the ping command as follows l p 3 November 23 2005 On the control point PC click Start Run The Run dialog box opens Type cmd and click OK The command prompt window opens Type ping then a space then the name of one of your K2 Storage System devices such as the Gigabit Ethernet switch as in the following example ping root gige 1 Press Enter The ping command should return the IP address of the device as in the following example Pinging root gige 1 mycorp com 192 168 100 61 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 Reply from 192 168 100 61 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 127 This verifies that the name of the device is being correctly resolved to the IP address which indicates that on the Control Point PC the host table entry is correc
323. rt Run The Run dialog box opens 2 Type cmd and click OK The command prompt window opens 3 Type ping then a space then the name of one of your K2 Storage System devices such as the Gigabit Ethernet switch as in the following example ping root gige 1 4 Press Enter The ping command should return the IP address of the device as in the following example Pinging root gige 1 mycorp com 192 168 100 61 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 Reply from 192 Reply from 192 Reply from 192 168 168 63 168 100 LOO 100 100 TH oLz Ods 613 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 time 10ms TTh 127 time lt 10ms TTL 127 time lt 10ms TTL 127 time lt 10ms TTL 127 This verifies that the name of the device is being correctly resolved to the IP address which indicates that on the Control Point PC the host table entry 1s correct November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 149 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System 5 Ping the other K2 Storage System devices to which you have assigned control network IP addresses 6 Go to each Windows device in the K2 Storage System and repeat this procedure This verifies that network communication is correct to and from all devices 150 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the level 3 storage system Configuring the level 3 storage system Use the topics in this section to do the initial configu
324. s _ Stacking _SupportMgmt URL YLANID VLAN Name VLAN Type Tagged Ports Untagged Ports STATIC None 2 4 6 8 10 12 1416 GVRP 18 20 None STATIC None 1 3 5 7 911 13 1517 DEF AULT_VYLAN STATIC Primary STATIC GYRP 19 heroes None None ADD REMOVE VLANs GVRP Enabled GVRP Mode 7 Create anew Media GSCSI VLAN as follows a Click Add Remove VLANs November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 31 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Add Remove VLAN Currrent VLAN Definitions 1 DEFAULT_VLAN Primary 60 Media VLAN Name Media 802 10 VLAN ID 60 Add VLAN New YLAN Name Rename Selected VLAN Set Primary LAN Remove Selected VLAN s Main Screen b In the VLAN Name field enter Media c In the VLAN ID field enter 60 d Click Add VLAN e Click Main Screen to return to VLAN Configuration 8 Configure the Media VLAN as follows a In the Media VLAN row click Modify Modify Port VLAN Configuration Port Current Mode VLAN ID 60 Untagged No VLAN NAME Untagged Mo MODE z Untagged No Untagged No Untagged No Untagged No oN One UN ele a Select All Apply Cancel b Select all the odd numbered ports Tip Use Ctrl Click c In the Mode drop down list select Untagged then click Apply This removes the odd ports from the default Control VLAN d Click the VLAN Configura
325. s and addresses of all the devices on the network then you can copy the same file onto all the other K2 devices instead of editing the hosts file on each K2 device Add the _he0 suffix to hostnames associated with FTP Streaming ports Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for more information K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Testing the control network If transferring to or from a Profile XP or Open SAN system via UIM the hosts file must also follow UIM naming conventions for those systems Refer to the UIM Instruction Manual To edit the hosts file manually 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editing application C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts 2 Enter all IP addresses with machine names The text format is simple First type the Ethernet IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Then type the machine name Here is an example doy ee a ee 16873922 LIZA Loe T92 LIZ t92 LO 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 168 168 168 168 100 101 100 100 pal zal yo on LOO server 2 root server 2 root server 2 root server 2 hed toot raid l root gige 1 4 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machines This is easier than editing the file on each machine Testing the control network To test the control network use the ping command as follows 1 On the control point PC click Sta
326. s copied to K2 Media Client but software not installed K2 Server Core system software Provides the primary media functionality Storage Utility Provides functionality for the remotely connected Storage Utility that runs on the Control Point PC You should not run Storage Utility locally on the K2 Media Server K2 System Provides to the remotely connected K2 System Configuration Configuration application the ability to configure the local machine You cannot run the K2 System Configuration user interface on the local K2 Media Server Control AppCenter user Connects to K2 Media Clients for control and configuration of Point interface channels K2 System Connects to K2 Media Clients K2 Media Servers RAID Configuration user interface storage and Gigabit switches for configuration of the K2 Storage System Storage Utility Connects to the K2 Media Server and through the K2 Media Server to the RAID storage for configuration of the media file system media database and RAID storage Installing Control Point software If you are using the Grass Valley control point PC it comes from the factory with software installed so you should not need to install software 242 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Installing K2 software If you intend to use a PC that you own as a control point PC make sure that you choose a PC that meets system requirements for supporting Control Point software Refer to Cont
327. s on the the NetCentral server PC which can be the K2 configuration control point PC Refer to the NetCentral User Guide Also refer to Control point PC description on page 224 Setting up the level 1 GigE switch These procedures are for the HP ProCurve switch If you are using the Cisco Catalyst switch make connections and settings to provide the same functionality Refer to the documentation you received with the switch as necessary e Use CATS or higher cables The maximum cable length is 50 meters e Assign an IP address and logon to the switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection on page 28 e Set up VLANs on the switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch VLANs on page 30 e Install the switch in its permanent location e Provide power to the switch November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 27 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System e Connect cables as follows Media Ports 1 19 odd Cr COE oe oS ole oO Control Ports 2 20 even To the media ports make one connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client and one connection from the RAID storage chassis To the control ports make one connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client two connections from the Level 1 RAID storage chassis and one connection from the control point PC Refer to Level 1 system description on page 26 fo
328. s without user intervention Each loop and associated Port Bypass Circuits along with all other active components are on redundant separate hot swappable modules With two RAID Controllers the two loops within a single standard chassis are configured as a single loop with a backup loop in standby mode High performance RAID processors that enable inter controller communication at 2GB s are installed to implement the shared memory system This feature not only enhances the performance but also helps dynamic load balancing of the host interfaces 232 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 K2 Level 3 RAID specifications The Switch based disk enclosures permits high speed access to the disk drives being used The L3 RAID chassis contains from fifteen half height 3 5 Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop FC AL disk drives The chassis also supports one or two hardware RAID Controllers in one 3U high rack mountable chassis The L3 RAID Expansion Chassis provides additional storage capacity The Expansion Chassis has one or two Expansion Adapters installed Up to seven L3 RAID Expansion Chassis can be connected to a single L3 RAID chassis comprising a single disk array storage system with up to 120 drives NOTE Grass Valley does not support mixing disk drives of differing capacities in a file system stripe group For servicing information on the L3 RAID storage system refer to the K2 Level 3 RAID Storage Instruction Manual
329. screen to set the IP address The following procedure is for the HP ProCurve switch If you have a Cisco switch accomplish the same tasks as appropriate Consult the documentation that came with the switch for more information 1 Configure the PC terminal emulator on the control point PC or another PC as a DEC VT 100 ANSI terminal or use a VT 100 terminal and configure either one to operate with these settings e Baud rate 9600 56 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 2 GigE switch e 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and flow control set to Xon Xoff e Also disable uncheck the Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows option 2 Connect the PC to the switch s Console Port using the console cable included with the switch 3 Turn on the PC s power and start the PC terminal program 4 Press Enter two or three times and you will see the copyright page and the message Press any key to continue Press a key and you will then see the switch console command CLI prompt 5 At the prompt enter setup to display the Switch Setup screen 6 Tab to the IP Config DHCP Bootp field and use the Space bar to select the Manual option 7 Tab to the IP Address field and enter the switch s control network IP address Refer to Networking tips on page 32 8 Tab to the Subnet Mask field and enter the subnet mask used for your network 9 Press Enter then right ar
330. separate This separation is provided by dedicated Gigabit ports cables and by VLANs on a single switch or by separate switches The streaming network and the control network are also physically separated by dedicated ports and cables but the traffic can be mixed on the same VLAN or switch Static IP addresses are required for the media network on K2 Storage System iSCSI devices This includes the iSCSI clients connected to the storage such as K2 Media Clients and NewsEdits and the K2 Media Servers Machine names host names assigned to each K2 device Host tables hosts files provide name resolution for the media network on each K2 Media Client iSCSI client and K2 Media Server IP addresses for FTP streaming ports must have name resolution such that hostnames are appended with the _heO suffix You can use host tables as in Setting up host tables on page 105 or another mechanism to provide the name resolution This directs the streaming traffic to the correct port Refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide for a complete explanation Only K2 Media Servers need to be on the streaming network This is because all streaming traffic goes directly to the shared storage 104 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Networking tips e On the K2 Media Client the four GigE ports are configured as two teams On external storage models one team is for the control network and one team is for th
331. shortcuts and registry entries t Remove S Remove Grass Valley Control Point From your computer Imstalsnield At the opening screen of the install wizard select Repair then use the following instructions for the type of software you are installing November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 243 Chapter 9 Managing K2 software K2 Client software Follow the onscreen instructions clicking Next on each page ie GrassValleyK2Client 1 4 Betas InstallShield Wizard Specify Target Type Indicate how this K2 Media Client is being used This K2 Media Client will be used with a K2 storage system This K Media Client will be used with its own internal storage When you arrive at the Specify Target Type page select as follows e This K2 Media Client will be used with a K2 storage system Select this option if you are installing on an external storage K2 Media Client e This K2 Media Client will be used with its own internal storage Select this option if you are installing on an internal storage K2 Media Client Click Next and Finish to complete the installation When prompted restart the machine K2 Server software Follow the onscreen instructions Click Next and Finish to complete the installation When prompted restart the machine Control Point software Follow the onscreen instructions Click Next and Finish to complete the installation Pre installed software Th
332. soft Windows XP e 400 MB hard disk space Professional Service Pack 2 e Minimum 512 MB RAM 1 GB e Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 recommended e Graphics acceleration with at least e Java JRE 1 3 1_12 and 1 4 2_05 128 MB memory This is required for the HP Ethernet e Pentium 4 or higher class processor Switch configuration interface 2 GHz or greater November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 91 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System e Install the Control Point software Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software e Install and license NetCentral server software You can install this on the the NetCentral server PC which can be the K2 configuration control point PC Refer to the NetCentral User Guide Also refer to Control point PC description on page 224 Setting up the level 2R redundant GigE switches These procedures are for the HP ProCurve switch If you are using the Cisco Catalyst switch make connections and settings to provide the same functionality Refer to the documentation you received with the switch as necessary e Use CATS or higher cables The maximum cable length is 50 meters e Assign an IP address and logon to each switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection on page 93 e Set up VLANs on each switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch VLANs on page 95 e Install the switches in their permanent location e Provide power to the switches e Con
333. splay green for both the file system and the database Power on the backup K2 Media Server This is the server that Server Control Panel reported was backup when you last powered down the K2 Storage System Flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes Put the backup K2 Media Server in service From the K2 System Configuration application open Server Control Panel and for the backup server click Start Wait until database replication is complete and indicators display green for both the file system and the database Verify that primary and backup server are in their correct roles Power on the remaining K2 Media Servers These are the redundant FTP servers Power on the primary first then the backup On each server flip down the front bezel and press the stand by button The LCD display lights during normal system operation Wait until start up processes are complete before proceeding When the server responds to the ping command startup is complete If you are not sure wait 10 minutes Power on K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients Using FTP for file transfer Refer to Chapter 10 FTP on the K2 Storage System K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005
334. ssumes a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Example of Level 3 names and IP addresses Computer Device type Streaming network Control network Media network Comments name addresses addresses addresses root_server_ 1 Media server 192 168 101 112 192 168 100 11 192 168 99 11 Media file system 192 168 99 12 database server root_server_2 Media server 192 168 101 21 192 168 100 21 192 168 99 21 192 168 99 22 FTP server root_raid_1 RAID 192 168 100 51 root_gige_1 GigE switch 192 168 100 61 root_gige_2 GigE switch 192 168 100 62 root_cppc_1 Control point 192 168 100 8 1 PC root_client_1 iSCSI client 192 168 100 111 192 168 99 111 root_client_2 iSCSI client 192 168 100 121 192 168 99 121 root_client_3 iSCSI client 192 168 100 131 192 168 99 131 root_client_4 iSCSI client 192 168 100 141 192 168 999 141 This NIC is not used since this server does not take the role of FTP server This IP address must resolve to hostname root_server_2_ he0 Setting up host tables The hosts file is used by the network to determine the IP address of devices on the network when only a the device name hostname is given The steps that follow describe how to edit the hosts file located at C Windows system32 drivers etc hosts on Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server operating system computers If you include the name
335. ssuming a keyboard monitor and mouse is connected to the local K2 Media Client in AppCenter select System Shutdown then select Shutdown or Restart and OK AppCenter exits Windows shuts down and powers off the K2 Media Client e Do a local shutdown restart via Windows Assuming a keyboard monitor and mouse is connected to the local K2 Media Client if AppCenter is not open you can use the normal Windows procedure to shutdown e Do aremote shutdown restart via the K2 System Configuration application In the tree view select the K2 Media Client and then click Shutdown or Reboot e Do a local hard shutdown Use this method only when there is a problem that prevents you from using one of the other methods for an orderly shutdown To do a hard shutdown hold down the standby button for approximately five seconds To restart press the standby button again Adding a K2 Media client The requirements for adding a K2 Media client to an existing K2 Storage System are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with 280 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Removing a K2 Media Client permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e The K2 Storage System must have adequate bandwidth available to meet the bandwidth needs of the K2 Media Client you are adding e The devices of the K2 Storage System do not need to be offline and there is no restart of devices required To
336. stem appears in the tree view of the K2 System Configuration application Continue with the next procedure Configuring the media server Part 1 Configuring the media server Part 1 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select PrimaryK2Server ga Frimarnk Serer Le 2 Click the Configure button Configure The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the media server for a level 2R K2 Storage November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 111 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System 112 System as described in the following table On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles a 4 a x m Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure m Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below JV SNFS file system server IV iSCSI bridge Enter the IP address of the ethernet switch to which this server is connected V Media database server ooo MV FTP server IV NAS server Enter the name or IP address for the media server as currently configured on the machine Enter the name or IP address of the Ethernet switch as currently configured on the switch to which the media server is connected For level 2 redundant leave all roles selected Click Next Software Configuration This pa
337. stem has one LI RAID chassis which provides the combined functionality of a K2 Media Server as well a RAID storage device The L1 RAID chassis has one GigE connection for media one GigE connection for control and one GigE connection for FTP The L1 RAID chassis hosts an iSCSI interface card for the GigE media connection The iSCSI interface card provides a bridge between 1SCSI and the internal SCSI connection to the RAID drives The L1 RAID chassis also hosts software components that allow it to function in various roles including media file system manager media database server and FTP server K2 Media Clients and other iSCSI clients such as NewsEdits are connected to the GigE switch Each client has one GigE connection for media and one GigE connection for control The GigE switch is configured with V LANSs to keep the control FTP traffic and the media SCSI traffic separate The K2 configuration control point PC is connected to the GigE control network The K2 System Configuration application runs on this PC for configuring the storage system Refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices for more information Preparing level 1 devices K2 Storage System Instruction Manual Use the topics in this section to prepare each device so that it is ready to become part of the level storage system e Setting up the control point PC on page 27 e Setting up the level 1 GigE switch on page 27 e Setting up the LI RAID
338. storage are now complete Preparing K2 Storage System clients Any devices that function as iSCSI clients to the K2 Storage System must be prepared with the following requirements e One or more connections to the control network e A static IP address for the control network e One or more connections to the media SCSI network Additional steps that are required for NewsEdits include the following e Implement NewsEdit security features For more information refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide Additional steps that are required for K2 Media Clients include the following 66 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral e If the K2 Media Client connects to the K2 Storage System with a redundant Ethernet fabric such as in Levels 2R and 3R install Multi path I O software For more information refer to the K2 Media Client System Guide Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral As you configure the K2 Storage System information is automatically sent to NetCentral When NetCentral receives the information it adds devices and populates its interface with a view of the K2 Storage System Before you begin using the K2 System Configuration application to configure the storage system you must set up the NetCentral system according to the following requirements e NetCentral installed NetCentral server software must be installed on a NetCentral server PC
339. t Ping the other K2 Storage System devices to which you have assigned control network IP addresses Go to each Windows device in the K2 Storage System and repeat this procedure This verifies that network communication is correct to and from all devices K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 71 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Configuring the level 2 storage system Use the topics in this section to do the initial configuration of the level 2 storage system e Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 72 Defining a new K2 Storage System on page 73 Configuring the media server Part 1 on page 75 Configuring RAID on page 77 Creating a new file system on page 82 Configuring the media server Part 2 on page 83 Prerequisites for initial configuration Before beginning your initial configuration make sure the devices of the K2 Storage System meet the following prerequisites Refer to sections earlier in this manual for detailed information Also refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices Devices Prerequisite for level 2 configuration Control point PC Ethernet cable connected Control Point software installed Control network IP address assigned Network communication over the control network with all other K2 devices Power on Ethernet switch Ethernet cables connected Control network IP address assigned VLANs set
340. t SNMP community public for NetCentral monitoring which already has RW permissions set as required by NetCentral proceed to the next step 16 Enter the SNMP community and IP address of the NetCentral server PC For example if the IP address is 192 168 40 11 and the community is public you type the following snmp server host public 192 168 40 11 17 Enable Authentication traps by typing the following snmp server enable traps authentication This allows NetCentral to test the switch to verify that it can send its SNMP trap messages to NetCentral 18 Type menu to get to menu mode 19 If you need trunks to gang switches together using 1 Gig connections do the following Note This is not required if you use the 10 Gig ISL connections Select Switch Configuration o 9 Choose selection 2 Port Trunk Settings Press the right arrow key to choose Edit then press Enter Q O Down arrow until at the bottom of the list of ports Right arrow over to the Group column mh Use the Space bar and set the bottom port to Trk1 Set the next port up also to Trk1 o gt ga Press Enter then right arrow to Save Press Enter again and revert to previous menu If you are at the command CLI prompt enter menu to go to the main menu screen 9 Choose Reboot Switch to restart the switch 94 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 2R redundant Gi
341. t of the LEDs go off and then may come on again during phases of the self test For the duration of the self test the Test LED stays on When the self test completes successfully the Power and Fan Status LEDs remain on the Fault and Test LEDs go off and the port LEDs on the front of the switch go into their normal operational mode which is as follows e If the ports are connected to active network devices the LEDs behave according to the LED Mode selected In the default view mode Link the LEDs should be on e If the ports are not connected to active network devices the LEDs will stay off If the LED display is different than what is described above especially if the Fault and Test LEDs stay on for more than 60 seconds or they start blinking the self test has not completed correctly Refer to the manual you received with the switch for troubleshooting information 3 Power on RAID storage devices Power on expansion chassis if present prior to or simultaneous with the power on for the main Fibre Channel chassis NOTE Always power on the RAID Expansion chassis prior to or simultaneously with the RAID Controller chassis Verify that start up indicators show normal start up processes as follows e Wait until all disk access LEDs are steady approximately 4 minutes e The controller READY LED is ON e The controller DIR LED flashes green e The front Power LED is ON e The front Service LED is OFF Refer
342. tch K2 Media Client K2 Media Client Generic iSCSI Client s Fibre Channel Switch lt Remove lt Back Next gt Cancel Move clients into the Number of Devices box as appropriate for your system You cannot change the number of K2 Media Servers or Ethernet Switches as these are pre configured based on the level you selected in the previous page Click Next 194 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server IA Part 1 On this page Do this Page 3 New K2 system Page 3 E x You have defined a K2 system with the following information Name 10 16 40 145 Configuration Level X eceu K2 system Number of servers x Number of switches x Number of clients x When you click Finish a tree view will be created showing the devices on your K2 system Click the Configure button to configure each device All servers must be configured before any clients lt Back Cancel Review the information on this page and verify that you have correctly defined your K2 Storage System For a level 3R storage system you should have the following e Two Gigabit Ethernet switches e Four K2 Media Servers e The number and type of clients appropriate for your system Click Finish The Define New K2 Storage System wizard closes Your K2 Storage System appears in the tree view of the K2 System Configuration application Continue with the next
343. ted to this message later in the procedure K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 2 On this page Do this iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapters and the page validates that the Fibre Channel adapter is in place and that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HE iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge C Primary Backup iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address Ha and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Subnet Bandwidth Subscribed OUCUdMIT 2124 192 168 100 100 299 299 299 0 n OMB NSO n O0c0dd01 2154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMB sec Modify View Target Drives Check Fibre Channel adapter Grass Valley Disk Adapter iSCSI adapter QLogic Target Mode QL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GY ST Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter Cli
344. th the K2 Media Client Path for the installer of the K2 Storage System with connected K2 Media Clients y K y K N J j q A J lt S J Q p S A K2 Media Client and B K2 Storage System K2 Storage System K2 Media Client Other Manuals Release Notes Instruction Manual System Guide These manuals include Contains the latest Contains instructions for installing Contains the product Quick Start Guide information about the and configuring K2 Storage specifications and User Manual hardware and software external with your K2 Media step by step instructions for Service Manual shipped with the system Client and K2 Media Server modifying system settings RAID Storage manuals Path for the operator 3 K2 Media Client K2 Media Client Release Notes User Manual pes Contains the latest Contains information for using rh A ie aE ee w n2 iA information about the the user interface to record A A AE aun y ae hardware and software play and manage clips andto Find the K2 Storage System Release Notes packaged with shipped with the system configure channels K2 RAID Storage devices primary chassis K2 Storage System Release Notes The release notes contain the latest information about the software shipped on your system The information in this document includes software upgrade instructions software specifications and requirements feature changes from the previous releases and any known problems Because rel
345. the primary RAID chassis These disks must be 15K rpm drives In addition the fifth disk in the primary RAID chassis also a 15K drive is bound as a Hot Spare This fifth 15K disk then provides Hot Spare functionality for the other four 15K disks the RAID 1 LUNs only Optionally you can also use some of your other 10K disks in groups of five as Hot Spares for your media storage LUNs Refer to Binding Hot Spare drives on page 294 for more information View disk properties and identify the four disks you will use for the RAID 1 LUNs the one 15K Hot Spare disk any other disks that you intend to use for media LUN Hot Spares and the remainder of the disks that are available for media storage LUNs Make sure you select disks appropriately as you bind LUNs in the remainder of this procedure 2 For redundant systems that use RAID 1 LUNs you must now create the separate RAID 1 storage for metadata files and journal files To bind unbound disks for metadata and journal storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for the controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu If the RAID chassis has two controllers both controllers are represented by the single Controller node The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list 200 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID Bind LUN 5 x LUM Type RAID 1 M Ful
346. the primary out of service it will trigger a failover event If the K2 Media Server that you want to take out of service is currently the primary you have the following options 274 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Placing a K2 Media Server in service e Make the current primary K2 Media Server the backup in an orderly fashion Refer to Triggering an intentional failover on page 272 Then when K2 Media Server is the backup you can take it out of service e Take the current backup out of service shutdown so that the primary K2 Media Server is the only file system database server currently in service You can then take the primary K2 Media Server out of service without triggering a failover event To take a media file system database K2 Media Server out of service do the following 1 Stop all media access on the K2 Storage System 2 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the K2 Storage System 3 Select Server Control Panel The Server Control Panel opens 4 Identify the K2 Media Server you intend to take out of service If there are redundant K2 Media Servers consider that you might trigger a failover event Refer to the explanation earlier in this section and to Triggering an intentional failover on page 272 5 When you are sure that you understand the implications of taking the K2 Media Server out of service click the Stop button for that server If required by cu
347. the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Client File System Client Configuration YIOEERDOOXK Configuration M File system client configuration This media server does not This file system client will connect to the file system server s listed here function as a file system server It does function as a f File system server 1 nda SMX file system client which is File system server 2 EEAO validated from this page File system drive letter F m File system client parameters Configured correctly lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration check is successful click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 213 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System On this page Do this iSCSI Bridge Server s HmiscsI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 x Configuration M Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge C Primary C Backup This page manages the i iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration comp onents that br idge The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address b etween i SC SI the Gi gE Haj and subnet by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the modify button MAC Address IP Address Bandwidth Subscribed media network and the the RAID s
348. ther port and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the FTP Streaming IP address and the subnet mask and click Apply Click Next File System Server Configuration HS File System Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 p i x M Storage and shared file system server configuration Launch the Storage Utility application to view or configure Launch Storage Utility the storage system and file system M Shared file system client configuration SS ES File system server 1 10 16 40 145 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Click Launch Storage Manager Storage Utility opens 3 Continue with the next procedure Configuring RAID to use Storage Utility to configure the storage and file system Leave the Configure K2 Server wizard open while you are using Storage Utility When you are done with Storage Utility you continue with the wizard as explained in Configuring the media server Part 2 on page 83 Configuring RAID Use Storage Utility to complete the configuration of the L2 RAID chassis as explained in the following topics e Configuring L2 RAID network and SNMP settings November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 77 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System e Binding disk modules Refer to Prerequisites for initial configuration on page 72 to confirm that the RAID storage 1s ready
349. thernet cable connected Control Point software installed Control network IP address assigned Network communication over the control network with all other K2 devices Power on Ethernet switch Ethernet cables connected Control network IP address assigned VLANs and trunks set up Power on K2 Media Server Ethernet cables connected Fibre Channel cable connected Redundant servers connected by serial cable Software installed as from the factory Control network IP address assigned Power on L2 RAID chassis Fibre Channel address ID assigned to RAID controller s Fibre Channel cable s connected Ethernet cable s connected Power on L2 RAID Expansion Chassis address assigned for Fibre Channel chassis Fibre channel cable s connected optional Power on 108 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Defining a new K2 Storage System Defining a new K2 Storage System Define a level 2R K2 Storage System as follows 1 On the control point PC open the K2 System Configuration application A login dialog box opens Please enter the administrative account name and password that will be used to configure the K2 sustems User name Password Ok Cancel 2 Log in to the K2 System Configuration application with the Windows adminstrator account By default this as follows e Username administrator e Password adminKk2 Refer to Setting up application security on page 262 for more
350. tion Le 2 Click the Configure button Configure The Configure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the L1 RAID storage device for a level 1 K2 November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 43 Chapter 2 Installing the Level I Storage System Storage System as described in the following table On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles a 4 a x m Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure M Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below V SNFS file system server IV iSCSI bridge V Media database server IV FTP server IV NAS server Enter the name or IP address for the L1 RAID storage device as currently configured on the machine For level 1 leave all roles selected Click Next Software Configuration HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 E xj This page checks for the M Installed software software r equir ed to suppor t Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed the roles you selected on the previous page Operating System Microsoft R Windows Ri Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Koon XOX Software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DX N Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed
351. tion tab 9 Close the switch configuration application 32 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the LI RAID chassis Setting up the L1 RAID chassis Do the following to prepare the L1 RAID storage device e Install the chassis in its permanent location Refer to the L7 RAID Instruction Manual for rack mount instructions e Connect the LI RAID chassis on page 33 e Power on the L1 RAID chassis on page 34 e Configure L1 RAID network settings on page 34 In addition you will bind LUNs These tasks are part of the K2 System Configuration application and Storage Utility procedures later in this chapter The process of binding LUNs can take a significant amount of time as much as eight hours so you might want to put priority on the tasks necessary to start the LUN binding process then catch up with other tasks while the LUNs are binding Also refer to K2 Level 1 RAID storage description on page 228 Connect the L1 RAID chassis Connect cabling as shown 0504050 26858586 L685 2626 lexestede 2426262 0QnQoQqOKOZOKOLO a IOSD SOOO SOO SOSO SOSO BONORO NOOO NONO OOOO OOCOOO OO0000 Media port L1 RAID Eth Chassis thernet cable Connect Connect Control Connect to a Keyboard Mouse VGA port USB monitor
352. tive at any given time Each controller in the L3R RAID chassis is also connected to the GigE control network which is required for SNMP NetCentral monitoring Level 3 redundant systems have both RAID 1 and RAID 5 LUNs in the RAID storage On the level 3 RAID chassis there are two RAID 1 LUNs for media file system metadata files and journal files The remainder of the RAID storage is RAID 5 LUNs for media The K2 configuration control point PC is connected to the GigE control network The K2 System Configuration application runs on this PC for configuring the storage system Refer to Chapter 7 Description of K2 Storage Devices for more information Preparing level 3R devices Use the topics in this section to prepare each device so that it is ready to become part of the level 3R storage system e Setting up the control point PC on page 173 e Setting up the level 3R redundant GigE switches on page 174 e Setting up the K2 media server on page 180 e Setting up the L3R RAID chassis on page 181 e Preparing K2 Storage System clients on page 186 Setting up the control point PC To set up the K2 configuration control point PC you have the following options e Use the Grass Valley control point PC that comes from the factory with software pre installed This includes the K2 System Configuration application remote AppCenter and NetCentral software e Use a PC that you own and install the required software
353. to five optional Expansion chassis are available for increased storage capacity K2 Media Clients have a teamed pair of Gigabit Ethernet ports for control and a teamed pair for media Each port of a teamed pair is connected to a different switch The GigE switches are configured with V LANs to keep the control and media traffic separate Each K2 Media Server has two GigE connections for media one GigE connection for control one GigE connection for FTP and one Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage The media server hosts iSCSI interface cards for the GigE media connections and a Fibre Channel card for the RAID storage connection The iSCSI interface cards provide a bridge between GigE 1SCSI and Fibre Channel SCSI Each media server also runs the software components that allow it to function in its specific roles Redundant K2 Media Servers with the role of media file system database server are connected by a serial cable which suppports the heartbeat signal required for automatic system recovery failover features November 23 2005 Preparing level 3R devices The L3R RAID chassis is connected via a Fibre Channel connection to each media server The connections to media servers 1A and 2A access the disks simultaneously for increased bandwidth Likewise the connections to media servers 1B and 2B access the disks simultaneously In addtion since the A connections and the B connections are redundant at most two K2 Media Servers are ac
354. to the following topics to add devices to an existing K2 Storage System November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 265 Chapter 11 Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System e Adding an iSCSI client e Adding an Ethernet switch e Adding a K2 Media Server Also refer to Adding a K2 Media client on page 280 Adding an iSCSI client Refer to the documentation for the type of iSCSI client you are adding If you are adding a NewsEdit refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide The options and configurations for generic iSCSI clients are different than those available for a K2 Media Client so you should not attempt this procedure without specific instructions for the type of iSCSI client you are adding The requirements for adding an iSCSI client to an existing K2 Storage System are as follows e You must be logged in to the K2 System Configuration application with permissions equivalent to K2 administrator or higher e The devices of the K2 Storage System do not need to be offline and there is no restart of devices required To add an iSCSI client to an existing K2 Storage System do the following 1 In the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree 2 Click Add Device The Add Device dialog box opens Add Device Add Device Select one of the following devices to add to this system C K2 Media Server C Ethem
355. torage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapter and the page validates that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI Modify View Target Drives Check tar gets Fibre Channel adapter Grass Valley Disk Adapter iSCSI adapter QLogic Target Mode GL44010 PCI iSCSI Adapter GV 00cUdd01 2124 192 168 100 10 209 255 205 0 OMB sec cccoccoccoccocccccoccsococccecocecesoscoceeeooossooocosesocooscccceccooecoocecceosocsecocoeeeeoooosescococeooococccccocosoococcececoocesccocceccooeooooocececeooososccceoeeeseooccccccocoosococcccocoosossooosecosoosesccceosseososeseccocossssssosecosossso 00cOdd012154 192 168 100 11 255 255 255 0 OMB sec For level 3 redundant select Primary Select an iSCSI adapter and click Modify A network configuration dialog box opens Enter the media network IP address and subnet mask and click Apply Do the same for the other iSCSI adapter To verify drives click Check then View Target Drives Click Next Completing the Click Finish The wizard closes The K2 Media Server restarts Do not Configuration Wizard proceed until restart processes are finished If you are not sure if startup is complete wait 10 minutes Configuring the redundant media server 2B You must wait for server 2A to restart before continuing For level 3 redundant the last media server to configure is server 2B It is the redundant partner to server 2A 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree vi
356. troller 1 and from media server 2B Interconnect switch A and switch B with two 10 Gig ISLs Refer to Level 3R system description on page 172 for a diagram of the complete system Refer to cabling procedures later in this chapter for the GigE connections at each of the devices of the K2 Storage System Also refer to K2 Ethernet switch description on page 225 Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection For redundant systems with two switches do the following on each switch Use a direct console connection to the switch start a console session and access the Switch Setup screen to set the IP address The following procedure is for the HP ProCurve switch If you have a Cisco switch accomplish the same tasks as appropriate Consult the documentation that came with the switch for more information l November 23 2005 Configure the PC terminal emulator on the control point PC or another PC as a DEC VT 100 ANSI terminal or use a VT 100 terminal and configure either one to operate with these settings e Baud rate 9600 e 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and flow control set to Xon Xoff e Also disable uncheck the Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows option Connect the PC to the switch s Console Port using the console cable included with the switch Turn on the PC s power and start the PC terminal program Press Enter two or three times and you will see the copyright page
357. ty Refer to the documentation you received with the switch as necessary e Use CATS or higher cables The maximum cable length is 50 meters e Assign an IP address and logon to each switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch via serial connection on page 175 e Set up VLANs on each switch Refer to Configuring the GigE switch VLANs on page 177 e Install the switches in their permanent location e Provide power to the switches e Connect cables as follows Media Ports 1 19 odd Oo ogo cleo Control Ports ISLs 2 20 even To the media ports on switch A make one media connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client two media connections from media server 1A and two media connections from media server 2A To the media ports on switch B make the second media connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client two media connections from media server 1B and two media connections from media server 2B To the control ports on switch A make one connection from each K2 Media Client 174 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Setting up the level 3R redundant GigE switches or other 1SCSI client from media server 1A from media server 2A from RAID controller 0 and from the control point PC To the control ports on switch B make the second control connection from each K2 Media Client or other iSCSI client from media server 1B from RAID con
358. u have the optional Expansion chassis you would have an additional three RAID 3 LUNs of five disks each NOTE L2 RAID controllers can take several hours to bind a LUN Make sure you initiate multiple simultaneous binding processes to reduce the overall time g Upon 100 completion click Close in Progress Report window NOTE Do not proceed until all LUNs are finished binding 4 Restart the K2 Media Server 5 Continue with the next procedure Creating a new file system November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 119 Chapter 4 Installing the Level 2R Storage System Creating a new file system 1 In Storage Utility click Tools Make New File System The Setting dialog box opens or Settings l Please enter the number of RTOs M Windows Security OF Cancel 2 For the Real Time Input Output RTIO rate enter the value specified by your system design If you do not know this value contact your Grass Valley representative 3 If the K2 Storage System is to be accessed by only K2 Media Clients you can leave Windows Security unchecked If accessed by NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions 4 Click OK The Set Stripe Group dialog box opens A Set Stipe Group O Available Drives K2Disk 512 69799936 K2Disk1 512 69799936 K2Disk2 512 559331328 K2Disk3 512 559331328 K2Disk4 512 559331328 K2Disk5 512 559331328 K2DiskE 512 559331328 Metastr
359. uide for instructions e For K2 Media Clients refer to K2 Media Client System Guide for instructions November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 217 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System Basic operations for level 3R storage Use the following procedures as you work on your level 3R storage system e Level 3R power off procedure e Level 3R power on procedure e Using FTP for file transfer For other procedures refer to Administering and maintaining the K2 Storage System on page 261 Level 3R power off procedure Use the following sequence to power off the level 3R storage system 1 Power off all K2 Media clients or other iSCSI clients 2 From the K2 System Configuration application in the tree view select the name of the K2 Storage System which is the top node of the storage system tree Then click the Server Control Panel button The Server Control Panel opens Server Control Panel K2seryer K2server E This Failover Monitor i running This Failover Monitor i running This File System Server is primary This File System Server is backup This Database Server tt primary E This Database Server it backup Database Replication i running Start Stop Stark Stop keserwerl is the primary FSM kesemez if the backup FSM 3 Take note of which is the primary K2 Media Server and which is the backup K2 Media Server The order in which you
360. uisites for initial configuration on page 40 to confirm that the RAID storage 1s ready for configuration Binding disk modules Use the following procedure to bind disk modules as required for the level 1 storage system NOTE Binding destroys all user data on the disks 1 Launch Storage Utility from the K2 System Configuration application as in the previous procedure 2 As prompted wait while Storage Utility gathers system information then Storage Utility opens 3 In the Storage Utility main window identify bound LUNs and unbound disks by their placement in the hierarchy of the tree view GYG Storage Utility Se o File View Actions Tools Help 4 To bind unbound disks for media storage do the following a Right click the Unbound node for a controller then select Bind LUNs in the context menu The Bind LUN dialog box opens showing all unbound disks for the controller listed in the Available Disk list 46 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring RAID Bind LUN 5 x LUM Type RAID 1 M Full Bind Selected Disks Disk as Disk r2 Aveallable Disks Flash the drive lights Identify NOTE Leave Full Bind selected Do not uncheck it b In the LUN TYPE drop down box select RAID 1 c In the Available Disks box select two contiguous disks at the top of the list TIP Use shift click or control click to select disks d Click t
361. uously polling devices to get their latest information The configuration file 1s saved on the V drive along with the media files in the shared storage system The configuration file is updated and saved whenever you change a configuration using the K2 System Configuration application That is why you must always use the K2 System Configuration application to change settings on the storage system so the most recently changed configurations will always be stored in the configuration file and displayed November 23 2005 Server Control Panel Server Control Panel Server Control Panel allows you to monitor and control the current status of a K2 Media Server in its roles as the media file system server and the media database server This is especially useful for redundant K2 Storage Systems Level 2R and Level 3R as you must know if a media server is currently acting as primary or as backup before attempting any troubleshooting or service work Server Control Panel displays information about the Failover Service the media file system server primary redundant roles the media database primary redundant roles and database replication If your K2 Storage System does not have redundant servers only the left panel one server appears Server Contrpl Panel Seles K2seryverl K2server This Failover Monitor is running D This Failover Monitor is running This File System Server ts primary D This File System Server is backup
362. up any RAID Expansion chassis prior to or at the same time as the RAID Controller chassis Verify power up as shown LL Power Cords 115V 230V Power up Verification e DIR and SVP LEDs on the RAID controllers are blinking green e Disk Link LED is steady ON green e FLT and BAT LEDs are OFF The front Power LED is ON Service LED is OFF after about 5 minutes Refer to the L3 RAID Instruction Manual if there is a problem Power LED Service LED er QO A Your preparations for L3R RAID storage are now complete Preparing K2 Storage System clients Any devices that function as iSCSI clients to the K2 Storage System must be prepared with the following requirements e One or more connections to the control network e A static IP address for the control network e One or more connections to the media ASCSI network Additional steps that are required for NewsEdits include the following e Implement NewsEdit security features For more information refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide Additional steps that are required for K2 Media Clients include the following 186 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Sending K2 configuration to NetCentral e If the K2 Media Clie
363. urations already completed on a previously configured K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 211 Chapter 6 Installing the Level 3R Storage System media server On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles yi K x Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below SNFS file system server Iv iSCSI bridge Media database server IV FTP server IV NAS server Cancel Enter the name for the media server This should be the current network name of the machine For level 3 redundant select iSCSI bridge FTP server and NAS server Click Next Software Configuration HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 if a x This page checks for the a softwar er equir ed to Suppor t Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed the roles you selected on the previous page Operating System Microsoft R Windows Ri Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Koon oox Software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed POX KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed DOK KKK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt C
364. ure K2 Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the media server for a level 2 K2 Storage November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 75 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System System as described in the following table On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles i ex Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure M Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below V SNFS file system server IV iSCSI bridge V Media database server IV FTP server IV NAS server Enter the name or IP address for the media server as currently configured on the machine For level 2 leave all roles selected Click Next Software Configuration HE Software Configuration 10 16 40 145 if a x This page checks for the a softwar er equir ed to Suppor t Install all software identified as Required in the list below if it isn t already installed the roles you selected on the previous page Operating System Microsoft R Windows Ri Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Koon XOX Software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed DX N Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed HOON SOK Software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed
365. use Connect the two iSCSI interface adapters to media ports on the GigE switch Connect the motherboard GigE port and GigE port 2 to control ports on the GigE switch Connect one of the Fibre Channel ports to the RAID storage device e Assign a control network IP address to GigE port 1 Use standard Windows procedures Refer to Networking tips on page 32 e Configure SNMP properties so the trap destination points to the NetCentral server PC If you are not using the SNMP community name public configure the community name and set permissions to RW Also make sure that the Authentication trap is enabled November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 61 Chapter 3 Installing the Level 2 Storage System Also refer to K2 Media Server description on page 226 Setting up the L2 RAID chassis Do the following to prepare the L2 RAID storage devices e Install the chassis in its permanent location Refer to the L2 RAID Instruction Manual for rack mount instructions e Assign Fibre Channel address ID on page 63 e Connect the L2 RAID chassis on page 63 e Assign chassis address on optional Expansion chassis on page 64 e Power on the L2 RAID chassis on page 66 In addition you will configure network settings SNMP settings and bind LUNs These tasks are part of the K2 System Configuration application and Storage Utility procedures later in this chapter The process of binding LUNs can
366. ve a recovery CD with your Level 1 RAID Storage device or K2 Media Server This recovery CD does not contain a disk image Rather the recovery CD is bootable and contains the Acronis True Image software necessary to create and restore a disk image You also receive a similar recovery CD for K2 Media Clients but it is specifically for the desktop Windows operating system Windows XP rather than for the server Windows operating system Windows 2003 server which runs on the Level 1 RAID Storage device and the K2 Media Server You cannot interchange these recovery CDs After your Level 1 RAID Storage device or K2 Media Server is installed configured and running in your system environment you should create new recovery disk images for the machine to capture settings changed from default These first birthday images are the baseline recovery image for the machine in its life in your facility You should likewise create new recovery disk images after completing any process that changes system software or data such as a software upgrade In this way you retain the ability to restore to a recent last known good state For the highest degree of safety you should create a set of disk image recovery CDs in addition to storing disk images on the E partition Since system drives are RAID protected in most failure cases the disk images on the E partition will still be accessible But in the unlikely even of a catastrophic failure whereby you l
367. ver A you next configure the redundant media server server B 1 In the K2 System Configuration application tree view select the media server you are configuring as server B 2 Click the Configure button The Configure K2 Storage System Server wizard opens Follow the on screen text to configure the server for a level 2R K2 Storage System as described in the following table Some screens require no input from you as they are based on the configurations already completed on a previously configured media server On this page Do this Define server roles HE Configure K2 Server Define server roles E x m Hostname Enter the hostname or IP address of the server to configure m Server roles This server will be configured for the roles selected below V SNFS file system server lv iSCSI bridge Enter the IP address of the ethernet switch to which this server is connected IV Media database server ooo V FTP server MV NAS server re Enter the name for the media server This should be the current network name of the machine Enter the name or IP address of the Ethernet switch as currently configured on the switch to which the media server is connected For level 2 redundant select all roles Click Next 124 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the redundant media server On this page Do this Software Configurat
368. view or configure the storage system and file system Launch Storage Utility M Shared file system client configuration File system server 1 File system server 2 File system client parameters lt Back Next gt Cancel Enter the name or IP address of the redundant media server server 1B Click Check When the wizard reports that the configuration is correct click Next If you get a The V will not be available until this device is rebooted message you can safely continue with this procedure and follow the instructions related to this message later in the procedure K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server IA Part 2 On this page Do this iSCSI Bridge Server Configuration This page manages the components that bridge between iSCSI the GigE media network and the Fibre Channel connection to the RAID storage You configure network settings on the iSCSI adapters and the page validates that the Fibre Channel adapter is in place and that the media LUNs are visible as iSCSI targets HBliSCSI Bridge Server Configuration 10 16 40 145 Bridge redundancy Specify if this bridge is a primary or backup bridge Primary Backup iSCSI and Fibre Channel port configuration The following list identifies all the iSCSI ports found on this device Modify the IP address and subnet by selecting the
369. ws R Server 2003 Standard Edition Service Pack 1 0 5 2 3790 Name Version Required Installed Koon SOO software 20008 Yes Installed K2 Server software 2 1 2 26 Yes Installed Hoon oox software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed oox AGKX software 2 5 2b56 Yes Installed SNMP Services Installed Check software currently installed Check Software lt Back Next gt Cancel If software with Yes in the Required column reports as Not Installed you must first install it on the media server before continuing Refer to Chapter 9 Managing K2 software After installing the software click Check Software When all required software reports as Installed click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 165 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System 166 On this page Do this Network Configuration This page displays the control network Ethernet port and allows you to configure the FTP Streaming network Ethernet port NOTE This page does not configure the iSCSI interface media network ports Hill Network Configuration 10 16 40 145 a x m Network Configuration The following list identifies all the Ethernet ports found on this device You can modify the Rs IP address and subnet of all ports that are not DHCP enabled by selecting the appropriate row and clicking the Modify button Port MAC Address IP Address Subnet Port 0 No 00 11 43 35 34 C4
370. ws Security unchecked If accessed by NewsEdits refer to the NewsShare Technical Reference Guide for instructions 4 Click OK The Configuration File dialog box opens 82 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual November 23 2005 Configuring the media server Part 2 EA Configuration File k a O x select Accept to acceptthe contiquration file Cancel to abort making new file system Edit to edit the configuration file SAS SRE DAS SHS SHS SAS SD SHS SAS Se SAS SS SRS eS AS SHS SAS SAS SH AS SH SoS AS Sa SAS SAS SH SAS SH SRS SAS SH SoS AS SS Sm SS SHS SAS GME Som em aha wham oe oem athe ots ohm aha we hm aan wem hm ata oem whe at aha ohm oem chm at cea aha oe wh aa oa oem ate ot oem ae HA global section for defining file system wide parameters H SAE SAE SR SAE SAS SAE AE Sas Sa SS San SRS eS ataa aaa aaa aaa aaa atata GlobalSuperU ser Windows ecurity Quotas FileLocks lnodeE xpandMin lnodeE xpandinc lnodeE xpandM ax Se Se 82 33 58 5 Debug Butferlaches ize Journals ize FsBlock Size Allocations trategy Seo amp Accept Cancel Edit The configuration file for the media file system is displayed You can verify media file system parameters by viewing this file Do not edit this file Click Accept A Please wait message box displays progress and a succeeded message confirms the process is complete 5 A message informs you that you must restart the media server how
371. you are creating C Level 2 Level 3 Custom C Nearline Server redundancy 7 Check this option if this system has failover capabilities lt Back Cancel Create a name for your level 3 K2 Storage System and type it in the Name box Select Level 3 Leave the Server redundancy option unchecked Click Next Page 2 HE New K2 system Page 2 E x 10 16 40 145 Device Assignment For the standard configurations the number of servers and switches is fixed Define the number of clients on this K2 system by selecting the appropriate device type and clicking the Select button Available device types Number of devices K2 Media Server DOSAN AA K2 Media Server Ethernet Switch K2 Media Server K2 Media Client Ethernet Switch Generic iSCSI Client K2 Media Client Fibre Channel Switch lt Remove K2 Media Client K2 Media Client K2 Media Client lt Back Next gt Cancel Move clients into the Number of Devices box as appropriate for your system You cannot change the number of K2 Media Servers or Ethernet Switches as these are pre configured based on the level you selected in the previous page Click Next November 23 2005 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual 153 Chapter 5 Installing the Level 3 Storage System 154 K2 Storage System Instruction Manual On this page Do this Page 3 Hill New K2 system Page 3 JA x You have defined

K2 Storage System Instruction Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents